WO2025067077A1 - Channel state feedback method and communication apparatus - Google Patents
Channel state feedback method and communication apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025067077A1 WO2025067077A1 PCT/CN2024/120114 CN2024120114W WO2025067077A1 WO 2025067077 A1 WO2025067077 A1 WO 2025067077A1 CN 2024120114 W CN2024120114 W CN 2024120114W WO 2025067077 A1 WO2025067077 A1 WO 2025067077A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- channel information
- features
- sequence
- feature
- information
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and more specifically, to a method and a communication device for feeding back channel status.
- network equipment needs to obtain downlink channel information fed back by terminal equipment in order to perform precoding and other processing on downlink data.
- network equipment can send a reference signal to the terminal equipment, the terminal equipment determines the channel based on the reference signal, and then feeds back the corresponding channel state information (CSI), which may include, for example, precoding information, the number of transmission streams supported by the channel (i.e., the rank of the channel), and the channel quality indicator (CQI), which is used to feed back the modulation coding scheme (MCS) recommended by the terminal equipment under the current channel quality.
- CSI channel state information
- CQI channel quality indicator
- the terminal device can compress the precoding information before reporting.
- the network device/terminal device can design and train an autoencoder based on an AI model to perform space-frequency dual-domain compression.
- network devices use different analog beam weights to send reference signals, and terminal devices measure the reference signals separately and feedback the measurement results of each reference signal.
- terminal devices For terminal devices with different reporting capabilities, network devices need to be configured with different AI models to support different reporting capabilities, which increases the storage/switching overhead of network devices and terminal devices.
- the present application provides a method and a communication device for feeding back channel status, which can reduce the storage/switching overhead of network equipment and terminal equipment.
- a method for feeding back a channel status is provided.
- the method may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by an encoder configured in the terminal device, and the present application does not limit this.
- the method comprises: compressing M channel information to obtain a first sequence, wherein the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, L is less than or equal to N, N is the number of channel information determined based on reference signals on K antenna port groups, the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information, M, L and N are positive integers; determining a second sequence according to the first sequence, the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information; and sending the second sequence to a decoder.
- N channel information corresponds to N simulation beams, and N can also be understood as the maximum number of simulation beams.
- the N simulated beams are different from each other, and there is an overlapping area in the coverage range of the N simulated beams.
- the network device and the terminal device may predefine or predetermine the maximum number of simulated beams N and the maximum feedback overhead X for joint feedback.
- the terminal device can measure L channel information and compress and feedback M of the channel information.
- the terminal device can perform partial measurement and partial compression feedback on multiple simulated beams within the maximum simulated beam range, avoiding the storage/switching overhead of the AI model and reducing the complexity of implementation.
- the joint feedback amount when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence before quantization, is the length of the first sequence or the second sequence, or, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence after quantization, the joint feedback amount is the number of bits of the first sequence or the second sequence.
- the correspondence between the stacking positions of the N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of the M channel information at the encoder input end is determined; and Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information are determined based on the correspondence.
- the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the encoder input end is defined.
- the relationship can determine the matrix of partial feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information from the matrix of the full feedback amount output from the encoder output end, thereby realizing compression and feedback of partial channel information.
- the first sequence includes N first features and O second features, the N first features correspond to the N channel information, the first features indicate a specific feature of each channel information, and the O second features indicate a common feature of the N channel information, and determining Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information according to the corresponding relationship includes: determining M first features according to the corresponding relationship and the N first features, the M first features corresponding to the M channel information; determining P second features corresponding to the M channel information according to the corresponding relationship and the O second features, where P is less than or equal to O, and O and P are positive integers; and determining Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information according to the M first features and the P second features.
- the common features and unique features in N channel information are defined separately, so that separable joint feedback can be achieved.
- partial feedback feedback of channel information under different numbers of simulated beams and different feedback overheads is supported.
- the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence
- the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence
- the N first features and the O second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component
- the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information
- the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information
- each of the M first features includes the feature principal component, some or all of the M first features include the feature supplementary component, each of the P second features includes the feature principal component, and some or all of the P second features include the feature supplementary component.
- the characteristic principal component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the supplementary component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the P second features.
- the features corresponding to each channel information have a corresponding relationship with the features corresponding to the N channel information.
- the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a network device, or the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a terminal device.
- the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the network device based on the priority information of the L channel information; or, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the terminal device based on the measurement results of the L channel information and/or the priority information of the L channel information.
- the feedback channel information and accuracy are determined according to the priority, thereby ensuring the efficiency and reliability of multi-beam reporting.
- the encoder is used in a terminal device.
- a method for feeding back channel status is provided.
- the method may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a decoder configured in the network device, and the present application does not limit this.
- the method comprises: receiving a second sequence, wherein the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to M channel information, wherein the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, L is less than or equal to N, and N is a reference signal decision based on K antenna port groups.
- the method comprises the following steps: determining a first sequence according to the second sequence, wherein the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information; and reconstructing the first sequence to obtain the M channel information.
- the network device can reconstruct the joint feedback amount of part of the channel information fed back by the terminal device to obtain M channel information, thereby avoiding the storage/switching overhead of the AI model and reducing the complexity of the implementation.
- the joint feedback amount is the length of the first sequence or the second sequence, or, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence after quantization, the joint feedback amount is the number of bits of the first sequence or the second sequence.
- the correspondence between the stacking positions of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking positions of the N channel information at the decoder input end is determined; and X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information are determined according to the correspondence.
- the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the input end of the decoder side is defined. Based on this correspondence, the matrix input decoder of the full feedback amount can be determined according to the matrix of the partial feedback amount corresponding to the M channel information of the terminal device, thereby realizing the reconstruction of partial channel information.
- the second sequence includes M first features and P second features
- the M first features correspond to the M channel information
- the first feature indicates a specific feature of each channel information
- the second feature indicates a common feature of the M channel information
- determining X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information according to the corresponding relationship includes: determining N first features according to the corresponding relationship and the M first features, the N first features corresponding to the N channel information; determining O second features corresponding to the N channel information according to the corresponding relationship and the P second features, where P is less than or equal to O; and determining X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information according to the N first features and the O second features.
- the positions of the M first features in the second sequence correspond to the positions of the N first features in the first sequence
- the positions of the P second features in the second sequence correspond to the positions of the O second features in the first sequence
- the M first features and the P second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component
- the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information
- the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information
- each of the N first features includes the feature principal component, some or all of the N first features include the feature supplementary component, each of the O second features includes the feature principal component, and some or all of the O second features include the feature supplementary component.
- the characteristic principal component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the supplementary component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the P second features.
- the accuracy levels corresponding to the M channel information are determined.
- the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a network device, or the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a terminal device.
- the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the network device based on the priority information of the L channel information; or, the M simulated beams or the accuracy level corresponding to the M simulated beams is determined by the terminal device based on the measurement results of the L channel information and/or the priority information of the L channel information.
- the terminal device when the M channel information is determined by the terminal device, the correspondence between the M channel information and the L channel information is sent; when the precision categories corresponding to the M channel information are determined by the terminal device, the precision categories corresponding to the M channel information are sent.
- the network device can determine the output matrix corresponding to M channel information from the output matrix of the full feedback amount according to the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the decoder side input end.
- the decoder is used in a network device.
- a communication device may be a terminal device, or may be an encoder configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in the present application.
- the device includes: a processing unit, used for compressing M channel information to obtain a first sequence, wherein the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, L is less than or equal to N, N is the number of channel information determined based on reference signals on K antenna port groups, N is a positive integer, and the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information; the processing unit is also used for determining a second sequence according to the first sequence, wherein the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information; and a transceiver unit is used for sending the second sequence to a decoder.
- a processing unit used for compressing M channel information to obtain a first sequence, wherein the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, L is less than or equal to N, N is the number of channel information determined based on reference signals on K antenna port groups, N is a positive integer, and the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information
- the processing unit is also used for determining a second
- N channel information corresponds to N simulation beams, and N can also be understood as the maximum number of simulation beams.
- the N simulated beams are different from each other, and there is an overlapping area in the coverage range of the N simulated beams.
- the network device and the terminal device may predefine or predetermine the maximum number of simulated beams N and the maximum feedback overhead X for joint feedback.
- the terminal device can measure L channel information and compress and feedback M of the channel information.
- the terminal device can perform partial measurement and partial compression feedback on multiple simulated beams within the maximum simulated beam range, avoiding the storage/switching overhead of the AI model and reducing the complexity of implementation.
- the joint feedback amount when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence before quantization, is the length of the first sequence or the second sequence, or, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence after quantization, the joint feedback amount is the number of bits of the first sequence or the second sequence.
- the processing unit is also used to determine the correspondence between the stacking positions of the N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of the M channel information at the encoder input end; the processing unit is also used to determine Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information based on the correspondence.
- the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the encoder input end is defined. Based on this correspondence, the matrix of partial feedback amounts corresponding to M channel information can be determined from the matrix of full feedback amounts output from the encoder output end, thereby realizing compression and feedback of partial channel information.
- the first sequence includes N first features and O second features
- the N first features correspond to the N channel information
- the first feature indicates a specific feature of each channel information
- the O second features indicate a common feature of the N channel information
- determining Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information according to the corresponding relationship includes: determining M first features according to the corresponding relationship and the N first features, the M first features corresponding to the M channel information; determining P second features corresponding to the M channel information according to the corresponding relationship and the O second features, where P is less than or equal to O; and determining Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information according to the M first features and the P second features.
- the common features and unique features in N channel information are defined separately, so that separable joint feedback can be achieved.
- partial feedback feedback of channel information under different numbers of simulated beams and different feedback overheads is supported.
- the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence
- the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence.
- the N first features and the O second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component
- the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information
- the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information
- each of the M first features includes the feature principal component, some or all of the M first features include the feature supplementary component, each of the P second features includes the feature principal component, and some or all of the P second features include the feature supplementary component.
- the characteristic principal component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the supplementary component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the P second features.
- the features corresponding to each channel information have a corresponding relationship with the features corresponding to the N channel information.
- the processing unit is further used to determine the accuracy levels corresponding to the M channel information.
- the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a network device, or the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a terminal device.
- the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the network device based on the priority information of the L channel information; or, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the terminal device based on the measurement results of the L channel information and/or the priority information of the L channel information.
- the feedback channel information and accuracy are determined according to the priority, thereby ensuring the efficiency and reliability of multi-beam reporting.
- the transceiver unit when the M channel information is determined by the network device, the transceiver unit is also used to send the correspondence between the M channel information and the L channel information; when the accuracy category corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the network device, the transceiver unit is also used to send the accuracy categories corresponding to the M channel information respectively.
- the encoder is used in a terminal device.
- a communication device may be a network device, or may be a decoder configured in a network device, which is not limited in the present application.
- the method includes: a transceiver unit, used to receive a second sequence, where the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to M channel information, where the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, where L is less than or equal to N, where N is the number of channel information determined based on reference signals on K antenna port groups, and N is a positive integer; a processing unit, used to determine a first sequence according to the second sequence, where the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information; and the processing unit is further used to reconstruct the first sequence to obtain the M channel information.
- the network device can reconstruct the joint feedback amount of part of the channel information fed back by the terminal device to obtain M channel information, thereby avoiding the storage/switching overhead of the AI model and reducing the complexity of the implementation.
- the joint feedback amount is the length of the first sequence or the second sequence, or, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence after quantization, the joint feedback amount is the number of bits of the first sequence or the second sequence.
- the processing unit is also used to determine the correspondence between the stacking position of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking position of the N channel information at the decoder input end; the processing unit is also used to determine X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information based on the corresponding relationship.
- the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the input end of the decoder side is defined. Based on this correspondence, the matrix input decoder of the full feedback amount can be determined according to the matrix of the partial feedback amount corresponding to the M channel information of the terminal device, thereby realizing the reconstruction of partial channel information.
- the second sequence includes M first features and P second features
- the M first features correspond to the M channel information
- the first feature indicates a specific feature of each channel information
- the second feature indicates a common feature of the M channel information
- determining X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information according to the corresponding relationship includes: determining N first features according to the corresponding relationship and the M first features, the N first features corresponding to the N channel information; determining O second features corresponding to the N channel information according to the corresponding relationship and the P second features, where P is less than or equal to O; and determining X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information according to the N first features and the O second features.
- the positions of the M first features in the second sequence correspond to the positions of the N first features in the first sequence
- the positions of the P second features in the second sequence correspond to the positions of the O second features in the first sequence
- the M first features and the P second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component
- the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information
- the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information
- each of the N first features includes the feature principal component, some or all of the N first features include the feature supplementary component, each of the O second features includes the feature principal component, and some or all of the O second features include the feature supplementary component.
- the characteristic principal component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the supplementary component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the P second features.
- the processing unit is further used to determine the accuracy levels corresponding to the M channel information.
- the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a network device, or the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a terminal device.
- the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the network device based on the priority information of the L channel information; or, the M simulated beams or the accuracy level corresponding to the M simulated beams is determined by the terminal device based on the measurement results of the L channel information and/or the priority information of the L channel information.
- the transceiver unit when the M channel information is determined by the terminal device, the transceiver unit is also used to send the correspondence between the M channel information and the L channel information; when the accuracy category corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the terminal device, the transceiver unit is also used to send the accuracy categories corresponding to the M channel information respectively.
- the processing unit is also used to determine the correspondence between the stacking positions of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking positions of the N channel information at the decoder input end; the processing unit is also used to determine the M channel information based on the correspondence.
- the network device can determine the output matrix corresponding to M channel information from the output matrix of the full feedback amount according to the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the decoder side input end.
- the decoder is used in a network device.
- a communication device which is used to execute the method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect.
- the communication device may include a unit and/or module, such as a processing unit and/or a communication unit, for executing the method provided in any one of the above implementations of the first aspect or the second aspect.
- the communication device includes a communication unit and a processing unit
- the communication unit may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface
- the processing unit may be at least one processor.
- the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
- the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
- the communication device is a chip, a chip system or a circuit in a network device.
- the communication unit may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip, the chip system or the circuit;
- the processing unit may be at least one processor, a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
- a communication device comprising a processor and, optionally, a memory, wherein the processor is used to control a transceiver to send and receive signals, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the sending device executes a method in any possible implementation of the first aspect or the second aspect mentioned above.
- the processor is one or more and the memory is one or more.
- the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be provided separately from the processor.
- the first device further includes a transceiver, which may specifically be a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
- a transceiver which may specifically be a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
- a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program or code, and when the computer program or code is executed on a computer, the computer executes any possible implementation method of the first aspect or the second aspect. The method in the formula.
- a chip comprising at least one processor, wherein the at least one processor is coupled to a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that a sending device equipped with the chip system executes a method in any possible implementation of the first aspect or the second aspect mentioned above.
- the chip may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
- a computer program product which includes: a computer program code, which, when the computer program code is executed by a sending device, executes a method in any possible implementation of the first aspect or the second aspect.
- the beneficial effects of the third to ninth aspects can refer to the beneficial effects of the first to second aspects and will not be elaborated on again.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a possible application framework applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a possible application framework applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG5 is a schematic diagram of CSI compression feedback applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture 600 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a method 700 for feeding back channel information applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG8 is a schematic diagram of an AI model design applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a stacking method of N simulated beam channel information at input and output ends applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a detachable joint feedback applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a method 1100 for feeding back channel information applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a compression feedback process applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG13 is a structural block diagram of a communication device applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 14 is a structural block diagram of a communication device applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- the technical solution provided in this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) or new radio (new radio, NR) system, long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (frequency division duplex, FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD) system, etc.
- the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation mobile communication system.
- the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to device to device (D2D) communication, vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine to machine (M2M) communication, machine type communication (machine type communication, MTC), and Internet of things (IoT) communication system or other communication systems.
- D2D device to device
- V2X vehicle-to-everything
- M2M machine to machine
- MTC machine type communication
- IoT Internet of things
- FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to a communication method of an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG1 ; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 and the terminal device 130 shown in FIG1 .
- the network device 110 and the terminal device (such as the terminal device 120 and the terminal device 130) may communicate via a wireless link.
- the communication devices in the communication system for example, the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, may communicate via a multi-antenna technology.
- FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram for ease of understanding, and the communication system may also include other network devices or other terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1 .
- the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1 is only an example of an application scenario of the embodiment of the present application, and the present application can also be applied to communication between any two devices, for example, communication between terminal devices and terminal devices, and communication between network devices and network devices. Communication between devices.
- FIG2 is a schematic diagram of another communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication system 200 shown in FIG2 further includes an AI network element 140.
- the AI network element 140 is used to perform AI-related operations, such as building a training data set or training an AI model.
- the network device 110 may send data related to the training of the AI model to the AI network element 140, which constructs a training data set and trains the AI model.
- the data related to the training of the AI model may include data reported by the terminal device.
- the AI network element 140 may send the results of the operations related to the AI model to the network device 110, and forward them to the terminal device through the network device 110.
- the results of the operations related to the AI model may include at least one of the following: an AI model that has completed training, an evaluation result or a test result of the model, etc.
- a part of the trained AI model may be deployed on the network device 110, and another part may be deployed on the terminal device.
- the trained AI model may be deployed on the network device 110.
- the trained AI model may be deployed on the terminal device.
- FIG. 2 only illustrates the example of the AI network element 140 being directly connected to the network device 110.
- the AI network element 140 may also be connected to the terminal device.
- the AI network element 140 may be connected to the network device 110 and the terminal device at the same time.
- the AI network element 140 may also be connected to the network device 110 through a third-party network element.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the connection relationship between the AI network element and other network elements.
- the AI network element 140 may also be provided as a module in a network device and/or a terminal device, for example, in the network device 110 or the terminal device shown in FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are simplified schematic diagrams for ease of understanding.
- the communication system may also include other devices, such as wireless relay devices and/or wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2.
- the communication system may include multiple network devices and may also include multiple terminal devices. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of network devices and terminal devices included in the communication system.
- the network device is an access device for the terminal device to access the mobile communication system by wireless means, for example, including an access network (AN) device, such as a base station.
- AN access network
- the network device may also refer to a device that communicates with the terminal device at the air interface.
- the network device may include an evolved Node B (also referred to as eNB or e-NodeB) in an LTE system or an advanced long term evolution (LTE-A); the network device may also include a next generation node B (gNB) in a 5G NR system; or, the network device may also include an access node in a wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) system, etc.; or the network device may be a relay station, an on-board device, and a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN) device, a device in a D2D network, a device in a machine to machine (M2M) network, a device in an Internet of Things (IoT) network, or a network device in a PLMN network, etc.
- PLMN public land mobile network
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device.
- the base station in the embodiment of the present application may include a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU), and multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU.
- CU and DU may be divided according to the protocol layer functions of the wireless network they possess, for example, the functions of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer and the protocol layers above are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the PDCP, such as the radio link control (RLC) layer and the medium access control (MAC) layer, are set in the DU.
- RLC radio link control
- MAC medium access control
- the radio frequency device can be remote and not placed in the DU, or it can be integrated in the DU, or part of it can be remote and part of it can be integrated in the DU, and the embodiment of the present application does not impose any restrictions.
- the control plane (CP) and the user plane (UP) of the CU can also be separated and divided into different entities for implementation, namely the control plane CU entity (CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity (CU-UP entity).
- the signaling generated by the CU can be sent to the terminal device through the DU, or the signaling generated by the UE can be sent to the CU through the DU.
- the DU can directly encapsulate the signaling through the protocol layer and transparently transmit it to the UE or CU without parsing it.
- the CU is divided into a network device on the radio access network (RAN) side.
- the CU can also be divided as a network device on the core network (CN) side, and this application does not limit this.
- the access network device may also be a server, etc.
- the network device in the vehicle to everything (V2X) technology may be a road side unit (RSU).
- RSU road side unit
- the base station may communicate with the terminal device, or may communicate with the terminal device through a relay station.
- the terminal device may communicate with multiple base stations in different access technologies.
- the core network equipment is used to implement functions such as mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and billing.
- functions such as mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and billing.
- the names of the devices that implement the core network functions in systems with different access technologies may be different, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
- the core network equipment includes: access and mobility management function (AMF), session management, policy and billing.
- Management function session management function, SMF
- policy control function policy control function
- PCF user plane function
- UPF user plane function
- the terminal device is a device with wireless transceiver function, which can send signals to the network device or receive signals from the network device.
- the terminal device may include user equipment (UE), sometimes also referred to as terminal, access station, UE station, remote station, wireless communication equipment, or user device, etc.
- UE user equipment
- the terminal device is used to connect people, objects, machines, etc., and can be widely used in various scenarios, such as but not limited to the following scenarios: cellular communication, D2D, V2X, machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC), Internet of Things (IoT), virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR), industrial control, self-driving, remote medical, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, drone, robot and other scenarios of terminal devices.
- cellular communication D2D, V2X
- M2M/MTC machine-to-machine/machine-type communications
- IoT Internet of Things
- VR virtual reality
- AR augmented reality
- industrial control self-driving, remote medical, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, drone, robot and other scenarios of terminal devices.
- the terminal device may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a VR terminal, an AR terminal, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in unmanned driving, a smart speaker in an IoT network, a wireless terminal device in telemedicine, a wireless terminal device in a smart grid, a wireless terminal device in transportation safety, a wireless terminal device in a smart city, or a wireless terminal device in a smart home, etc.
- the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
- Wearable devices may also be referred to as wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc., which are a general term for wearable devices that are intelligently designed and developed using wearable technology for daily wear, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes.
- the various terminal devices introduced above, if located on a vehicle can be considered as vehicle-mounted terminal devices, and vehicle-mounted terminal devices are also referred to as on-board units (OBUs).
- the terminal device of the present application may also be a vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted component, vehicle-mounted chip or vehicle-mounted unit that is built into the vehicle as one or more components or units.
- the vehicle can implement the method of the present application through the built-in vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted component, vehicle-mounted chip or vehicle-mounted unit.
- the communication device for realizing the function of the network device may be a network device, or may be a device capable of supporting the network device to realize the function, such as a chip system, which may be installed in the network device.
- the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the device for realizing the function of the network device as an example that the network device is used as the device.
- the technical solution provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to the fourth generation mobile communication technology (the 4th generation, 4G) system, 5G system, NTN system, vehicle to everything (vehicle to everything, V2X), long-term evolution-vehicle network (LTE-vehicle, LTE-V), vehicle to vehicle (vehicle to vehicle, V2V), vehicle network, machine type communications (Machine Type Communications, MTC), Internet of things (internet of things, IoT), long-term evolution-machine to machine (LTE-machine to machine, LTE-M), machine to machine (machine to machine, M2M), Internet of Things, or future mobile communication systems.
- Network devices and terminal devices can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on the water; they can also be deployed on aircraft, balloons and satellites in the air.
- the scenarios in which network devices and terminal devices are located are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
- terminal devices and network devices can be hardware devices, or they can be software functions running on dedicated hardware, software functions running on general-purpose hardware, such as virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud platform), or entities including dedicated or general-purpose hardware devices and software functions.
- a platform e.g., a cloud platform
- the present application does not limit the specific forms of terminal devices and network devices.
- AI nodes may also be introduced into the network.
- the AI node can be deployed in one or more of the following locations in the communication system: access network equipment, terminal equipment, or core network equipment, etc., or the AI node can also be deployed separately, for example, deployed in a location other than any of the above devices, such as a host or cloud server in an over-the-top (OTT) system.
- the AI node can communicate with other devices in the communication system, and the other devices can be, for example, one or more of the following: network equipment, terminal equipment, or network elements of the core network, etc.
- the present application does not limit the number of AI nodes.
- the multiple AI nodes can be divided based on functions, such as different AI nodes are responsible for different functions.
- AI nodes can be independent devices, or they can be integrated into the same device to implement different functions, or they can be network elements in hardware devices, or they can be software functions running on dedicated hardware, or they can be virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (for example, a cloud platform).
- a platform for example, a cloud platform
- An AI node can be an AI network element or an AI module.
- FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a possible application framework in a communication system.
- network elements in the communication system are connected via interfaces (e.g., NG, Xn) or air interfaces.
- One or more AI modules are provided in one or more of these network element nodes, such as core network equipment, access network nodes (RAN nodes), terminals, or OAM devices (for clarity, only one is shown in FIG3 ).
- the access network node may be a separate RAN node, or may include multiple RAN nodes, for example, including a CU and a DU.
- the CU and/or DU may also be One or more AI modules can be set.
- the CU can also be split into CU-CP and CU-UP.
- One or more AI models are set in the CU-CP and/or CU-UP.
- the AI module is used to implement the corresponding AI function.
- the AI modules deployed in different network elements may be the same or different.
- the model of the AI module can implement different functions according to different parameter configurations.
- the model of the AI module can be configured based on one or more of the following parameters: structural parameters (such as the number of neural network layers, the width of the neural network, the connection relationship between layers, the weight of the neuron, the activation function of the neuron, or at least one of the biases in the activation function), input parameters (such as the type of input parameters and/or the dimension of input parameters), or output parameters (such as the type of output parameters and/or the dimension of output parameters).
- the bias in the activation function can also be called the bias of the neural network.
- An AI module can have one or more models.
- a model can be inferred to obtain an output, which includes one parameter or multiple parameters.
- the learning process, training process, or inference process of different models can be deployed in different nodes or devices, or can be deployed in the same node or device.
- FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a possible application framework in a communication system.
- the communication system includes a RAN intelligent controller (RIC).
- the RIC may be the AI module shown in FIG3 , which is used to implement AI-related functions.
- the RIC includes a near-real-time RIC (near-real-time RIC, near-RT RIC) and a non-real-time RIC (non-real-time RIC, Non-RT RIC).
- the non-real-time RIC mainly processes non-real-time information, such as data that is not sensitive to delay, and the delay of the data may be in the order of seconds.
- the real-time RIC mainly processes near-real-time information, such as data that is relatively sensitive to delay, and the delay of the data is in the order of tens of milliseconds.
- the near real-time RIC is used for model training and reasoning. For example, it is used to train an AI model and use the AI model for reasoning.
- the near real-time RIC can obtain information on the network side and/or the terminal side from a RAN node (e.g., CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and/or RU) and/or a terminal. This information can be used as training data or reasoning data.
- the near real-time RIC can submit the reasoning results to the RAN node and/or the terminal.
- the reasoning results can be exchanged between the CU and the DU, and/or between the DU and the RU.
- the near real-time RIC submits the reasoning results to the DU, and the DU sends it to the RU.
- the non-real-time RIC is also used for model training and reasoning. For example, it is used to train an AI model and use the model for reasoning.
- the non-real-time RIC can obtain information on the network side and/or the terminal side from a RAN node (such as a CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU and/or RU) and/or a terminal.
- the information can be used as training data or reasoning data, and the reasoning results can be submitted to the RAN node and/or the terminal.
- the reasoning results can be exchanged between the CU and the DU, and/or between the DU and the RU.
- the non-real-time RIC submits the reasoning results to the DU, and the DU sends it to the RU.
- the near real-time RIC and the non-real-time RIC may also be separately set as a network element.
- the near real-time RIC and the non-real-time RIC may also be part of other devices, for example, the near real-time RIC is set in a RAN node (for example, in a CU or DU), and the non-real-time RIC is set in an OAM, a cloud server, a core network device, or other network devices.
- Artificial intelligence can be understood as machines having the ability to learn, accumulate experience, and solve problems that humans can solve through experience, such as natural language understanding, image recognition, and chess. Artificial intelligence can also be understood as the intelligence displayed by machines made by humans. Usually artificial intelligence refers to the technology that presents human intelligence through computer programs. The goals of artificial intelligence include understanding intelligence by building computer programs with symbolic reasoning or inference.
- Machine learning is a way to implement artificial intelligence.
- Machine learning is a method that can give machines the ability to learn, so that machines can complete functions that cannot be completed by direct programming.
- machine learning is a method of using data to train a model and then using the model to predict.
- machine learning methods such as neural networks (NN), decision trees, support vector machines, etc.
- Machine learning theory mainly designs and analyzes some algorithms that allow computers to learn automatically.
- Machine learning algorithms are a type of algorithm that automatically analyzes data to obtain patterns and uses the patterns to predict unknown data.
- Neural network is a specific embodiment of machine learning method. Neural network is a mathematical model that imitates the behavioral characteristics of animal neural network and processes information. The idea of neural network comes from the neuron structure of brain tissue. Each neuron can perform weighted sum operation on its input value, and the result of weighted sum operation is used to generate output through an activation function.
- a neural network generally includes a multi-layer structure, each layer of which may include one or more logic judgment units, which may be called neurons.
- the expressive power of the neural network can be improved, providing a basis for complex systems. More powerful information extraction and abstract modeling capabilities.
- the depth of the neural network can be understood as the number of layers included in the neural network, and the number of neurons included in each layer can be called the width of the layer.
- the neural network includes an input layer and an output layer. The input layer of the neural network processes the received input through neurons and passes the result to the output layer, and the output layer obtains the output result of the neural network.
- the neural network includes an input layer, a hidden layer, and an output layer.
- the input layer of the neural network processes the received input through neurons and passes the result to the middle hidden layer, and the hidden layer then passes the calculation result to the output layer or the adjacent hidden layer, and finally the output layer obtains the output result of the neural network.
- a neural network can include one or more hidden layers connected in sequence without restriction.
- a loss function can be defined.
- the loss function is used to measure the difference between the predicted value of the model and the true value.
- the loss function describes the gap or difference between the output value of the neural network and the ideal target value.
- the training process of a neural network is to adjust the parameters of the neural network so that the value of the loss function is less than the threshold value or meets the target requirements.
- the neural network parameters may include at least one of the following: the number of layers of the neural network, the width, the weight of the neuron, and the parameters in the activation function of the neuron.
- An AI model is an algorithm or computer program that can implement AI functions.
- the AI model characterizes the mapping relationship between the input and output of the model, or the AI model is a function model that maps an input of a certain dimension to an output of a certain dimension, and the parameters of the function model can be obtained through machine learning training.
- a and b are the parameters of the AI model, and a and b can be obtained through machine learning training.
- the AI models mentioned in the embodiments below of the present application are not limited to neural networks, linear regression models, decision tree models, support vector machines (SVM), Bayesian networks, Q learning models or other machine learning (ML) models.
- AI model design mainly includes data collection (for example, collecting training data and/or inference data), model training and model inference. It can also include the application of inference results.
- data collection link the data source is used to provide training data sets and inference data.
- model training link the AI model is obtained by analyzing or training the training data provided by the data source. Learning the AI model through the model training node is equivalent to using the training data to learn the mapping relationship between the input and output of the AI model.
- the AI model trained through the model training link is used to perform inference based on the inference data provided by the data source to obtain the inference result.
- This link can also be understood as: inputting the inference data into the AI model, and obtaining the output through the AI model, which is the inference result.
- the inference result can indicate: the configuration parameters used (executed) by the execution object, and/or the operation performed by the execution object.
- the reasoning results are published in the reasoning result application link.
- the reasoning results can be uniformly planned by the execution (actor) entity.
- the execution entity can send the reasoning results to one or more execution objects (for example, core network equipment, access network equipment, or terminal equipment, etc.) for execution.
- the execution entity can also feedback the performance of the AI model to the data source to facilitate the subsequent update and training of the AI model.
- the implementation of the AI model can be a hardware circuit, or software, or a combination of software and hardware, without limitation.
- Non-limiting examples of software include: program code, program, subroutine, instruction, instruction set, code, code segment, software module, application, or software application, etc.
- the two-end model can also be called a bilateral model, a collaborative model, a dual model, or a two-side model.
- the two-end model refers to a model composed of multiple sub-models.
- the multiple sub-models that constitute the model need to match each other.
- the multiple sub-models can be deployed in different nodes.
- the embodiments of the present application involve an encoder for compressing CSI and a decoder for recovering compressed CSI.
- the encoder and the decoder are used in matching manner, and it can be understood that the encoder and the decoder are matching AI models.
- An encoder may include one or more AI models, and the decoder matched by the encoder also includes one or more AI models. The number of AI models included in the matching encoder and decoder is the same and corresponds one to one.
- a set of matched encoders and decoders can be specifically two parts of the same auto-encoder (AE), for example, as shown in Figure 5.
- AE auto-encoder
- the AE model in which the encoder and decoder are deployed on different nodes is a typical bilateral model.
- the encoder and decoder of the AE model are usually a jointly trained encoder and decoder.
- the encoder processes the input V to obtain the processed result z, and the decoder can decode the encoder output z into the desired output V'.
- An autoencoder is a neural network for unsupervised learning. Its characteristic is that it uses input data as label data. Therefore, an autoencoder can also be understood as a neural network for self-supervised learning.
- An autoencoder can be used for data compression and recovery. For example, the encoding in an autoencoder The encoder can compress (encode) data A to obtain data B; the decoder in the autoencoder can decompress (decode) data B to restore data A. Or it can be understood that the decoder is the inverse operation of the encoder.
- the AI model in the embodiment of the present application may include an encoder and a decoder.
- the encoder and the decoder are used in combination, and it can be understood that the encoder and the decoder are matching AI models.
- the encoder and the decoder can be deployed on the terminal device and the network device respectively.
- the AI model in the embodiment of the present application may be a single-end model, which may be deployed on a terminal device or a network device.
- CSI is a type of channel information, which is information that can reflect channel characteristics and channel quality.
- the reference signal may include one or more of the channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (SSB), sounding reference signal (SRS) or demodulation reference signal (DMRS).
- CSI-RS, SSB and DMRS can be used to measure downlink CSI.
- SRS and DMRS can be used to measure uplink CSI.
- the network equipment since the uplink and downlink channels are not reciprocal or cannot be guaranteed, the network equipment usually sends a downlink reference signal to the terminal device, and the terminal device performs channel measurement and interference measurement based on the received downlink reference signal to estimate the downlink CSI.
- the terminal device generates a CSI report according to the protocol predefined method or the network device configuration method, and feeds it back to the network device so that it can obtain the downlink CSI.
- CSI may include at least one of the following: channel quality indication (CQI), precoding matrix indicator (PMI), rank indicator (RI), CSI-RS resource indicator (CRI), layer indicator (LI), reference signal receiving power (RSRP) or signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), etc.
- CQI channel quality indication
- PMI precoding matrix indicator
- RI rank indicator
- LI layer indicator
- RSRP reference signal receiving power
- SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
- the signal to interference plus noise ratio may also be called signal to interference plus noise ratio.
- RI is used to indicate the number of downlink transmission layers recommended by the terminal device
- CQI is used to indicate the modulation and coding mode supported by the current channel conditions determined by the terminal device
- PMI is used to indicate the precoding recommended by the terminal device.
- the number of precoding layers indicated by PMI corresponds to RI.
- the RI, CQI and PMI indicated in the above CSI report are only recommended values for the terminal device, and the network device may perform downlink transmission according to part or all of the information indicated in the CSI report. Alternatively, the network device may not perform downlink transmission according to the information indicated in the CSI report.
- the introduction of AI technology into wireless communication networks has resulted in a CSI feedback method based on the AI model.
- the terminal device uses the AI model to compress and feedback the CSI
- the network device uses the AI model to restore the compressed CSI.
- a sequence (such as a bit sequence) is transmitted, and the overhead is lower than that of traditional CSI feedback.
- Figure 5 shows a schematic diagram of CSI compression feedback of an embodiment of the present application.
- the encoder in Figure 5 can be a CSI generator, and the decoder can be a CSI reconstructor.
- the encoder can be deployed in a terminal device, and the decoder can be deployed in a network device.
- the terminal device can generate CSI feedback information z from the CSI original information V through the encoder.
- the terminal device reports a CSI report, which may include the CSI feedback information z.
- the network device can reconstruct the CSI information through the decoder, that is, obtain the CSI recovery information V'.
- the CSI original information V may be obtained by the terminal device through CSI measurement.
- the CSI original information V may include the channel response of the downlink channel or the eigenvector matrix (a matrix composed of eigenvectors) of the downlink channel.
- the encoder processes the eigenvector matrix of the downlink channel to obtain CSI feedback information z.
- the compression and/or quantization operation of the characteristic matrix according to the codebook in the related scheme is replaced by the operation of processing the characteristic matrix by the encoder to obtain CSI feedback information z.
- the terminal device reports the CSI feedback information z.
- the network device processes the CSI feedback information z through a decoder to obtain CSI recovery information V'.
- the training data used to train the AI model includes training samples and sample labels.
- the training samples are channel information determined by the terminal device, and the sample labels are real channel information, i.e., true CSI.
- the training data may only include training samples, or the training samples are sample labels.
- the true CSI may be a high-precision CSI.
- the specific training process is as follows: the model training node uses the encoder to process the channel information, that is, the training samples, to obtain CSI feedback information, and uses the decoder to process the feedback information to obtain the restored channel information, that is, the CSI restored information. Then, the difference between the CSI restored information and the corresponding sample label is calculated, that is, the value of the loss function, and the parameters of the encoder and decoder are updated according to the value of the loss function so that the restored information The difference between the channel information and the corresponding sample label is minimized, that is, the loss function is minimized.
- the loss function can be the minimum mean square error (MSE) or cosine similarity. Repeating the above operation can obtain an encoder and decoder that meet the target requirements.
- the above model training node can be a terminal device, a network device, or other network elements with AI functions in the communication system.
- the AI model can also be used in other scenarios.
- the AI model can be used for CSI prediction, that is, predicting the channel information at one or more future moments based on the channel information measured at one or more historical moments.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific use of the AI model in the CSI feedback scenario.
- Antenna port is a logical concept. There is no direct correspondence between an antenna port and a physical antenna. Antenna port is usually associated with reference signal, and its meaning can be understood as a transceiver interface on the channel through which the reference signal passes. For low frequency, an antenna port may correspond to one or more antenna elements, which jointly send reference signals. The receiving end can treat them as a whole without distinguishing these elements. For high frequency systems, antenna port may correspond to a beam. Similarly, the receiving end only needs to regard this beam as an interface without distinguishing each element.
- the port group refers to the antenna port group/reference signal port group.
- a port group can contain multiple reference signals.
- the concept of port group refers to multiple reference signals sent by the base station using the same analog weight/analog beam. Therefore, in the present invention, the base station can use one or more reference signal port groups to measure the channel information under an analog beam.
- a beam is a communication resource.
- a beam can be a wide beam, a narrow beam, or other types of beams.
- the technology for forming a beam can be a beamforming technology or other technical means.
- the beamforming technology can be specifically digital beamforming technology, analog beamforming technology, and hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources.
- the same information or different information can be sent through different beams.
- multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics can be regarded as a beam.
- a beam can include one or more antenna ports for transmitting data channels, control channels, and detection signals.
- a transmit beam can refer to the distribution of signal strength formed in different directions of space after the signal is transmitted by the antenna
- a receive beam can refer to the distribution of signal strength of wireless signals received from the antenna in different directions of space.
- one or more antenna ports that form a beam can also be regarded as an antenna port set.
- the embodiment of the beam in the protocol can still be a spatial filter.
- uplink communication includes the transmission of uplink physical channels and uplink signals.
- the uplink physical channels include random access channel (PRACH), uplink control channel (PUCCH), uplink data channel (PUSCH), etc.
- the uplink signals include channel sounding signal SRS, uplink control channel demodulation reference signal (PUCCH de-modulation reference signal, PUCCH-DMRS), uplink data channel demodulation reference signal PUSCH-DMRS, uplink phase noise tracking signal (PTRS), uplink positioning signal (uplink positioning RS), etc.
- Downlink communication includes the transmission of downlink physical channels and downlink signals.
- the downlink physical channels include physical broadcast channel (PBCH), downlink control channel (PDCCH), downlink data channel (PDSCH), etc.
- the downlink signals include primary synchronization signal (PSS)/secondary synchronization signal (SSS), downlink control channel demodulation reference signal PDCCH-DMRS, downlink data channel demodulation reference signal PDSCH-DMRS, phase noise tracking signal PTRS, channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS), cell signal (CRS), time/frequency tracking reference signal (TRS), LTE/NR positioning signal (positioning RS), etc.
- PSS primary synchronization signal
- SSS secondary synchronization signal
- PDCCH-DMRS downlink control channel demodulation reference signal
- PDSCH-DMRS downlink data channel demodulation reference signal
- phase noise tracking signal PTRS phase noise tracking signal
- CSI-RS channel status information reference signal
- CRS cell signal
- TRS time/frequency tracking reference signal
- LTE/NR positioning signal LTE/NR positioning signal
- the multiple input multiple output (MIMO) technology is used to increase system capacity and improve throughput.
- y is the received signal
- H is the MIMO channel
- x is the transmitted signal
- n is the noise.
- precoding is used to reduce system overhead and maximize the system capacity of MIMO on the one hand, and to reduce the complexity of the receiver to eliminate the impact between channels on the other hand.
- P can be selected from a predefined set of matrices (or vectors), which is called a codebook.
- This method is also called a codebook-based transmission method. If the transmitter can obtain all the information of H, P can be obtained by itself at the transmitter. This method is also called a non-codebook transmitter. law (non-codebook, NCB).
- indication includes direct indication (also called explicit indication) and implicit indication.
- direct indication of information A means including the information A;
- implicit indication of information A means indicating information A through the correspondence between information A and information B and direct indication of information B.
- the correspondence between information A and information B can be predefined, pre-stored, pre-burned, or pre-configured.
- information C is used to determine information D, which includes information D being determined based only on information C, and information D being determined based on information C and other information.
- information C is used to determine information D, and it can also be indirectly determined, for example, information D is determined based on information E, and information E is determined based on information C.
- network element A sends information A to network element B
- network element B in each embodiment of the present application can be understood as the destination end of the information A or the intermediate network element in the transmission path between the destination end and the network element B, which may include directly or indirectly sending information to network element B.
- Network element B receives information A from network element A can be understood as the source end of the information A or the intermediate network element in the transmission path between the source end and the network element A, which may include directly or indirectly receiving information from network element A.
- the information may be processed as necessary between the source end and the destination end of the information transmission, such as format changes, etc., but the destination end can understand the valid information from the source end. Similar expressions in the present application can be understood similarly and will not be repeated here.
- the network device may be a core network device, an access network node (RAN node) or one or more devices in OAM as shown in FIG. 1.
- the AI module may be the RIC shown in FIG. 4, such as a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC.
- the near real-time RIC is set in a RAN node (e.g., in a CU, DU), while the non-real-time RIC is set in an OAM, a cloud server, a core network device, or other network devices.
- RIC can be obtained by obtaining subsets from multiple terminal devices from a RAN node (e.g., a CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU and/or RU), reorganized into a training data set #2, and trained based on the training data set #2.
- a RAN node e.g., a CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU and/or RU
- the near real-time RIC and the non-real-time RIC may also be separately configured as a network element, and the network device may be the near real-time RIC or the non-real-time RIC.
- network equipment and terminals in some frequency bands
- large-scale array antennas for example, 500 to 1000 antenna units
- array weighting methods that is, different beamforming methods
- the first category digital beamforming (DBF), each antenna unit or a group of antenna units is directly connected to a digital channel. Since each antenna signal is directly converted to the digital domain, the subsequent array weighting is performed in the digital domain, so it is called digital beamforming.
- the digital domain signal processing has a high degree of freedom and can support complex signal processing methods. Therefore, under the same array scale, the performance of the DBF architecture is good.
- ADC/DAC digital-to-analog/analog-to-digital converter
- the cost of DBF is higher under the same array scale.
- the second category analog beamforming (ABF), each or a group of antenna units is connected to an analog phase shifter, and multiple antenna units are combined in the analog domain and then passed through a digital-to-analog/analog-to-digital converter.
- ABF analog beamforming
- each or a group of antenna units is connected to an analog phase shifter, and multiple antenna units are combined in the analog domain and then passed through a digital-to-analog/analog-to-digital converter.
- DBF digital-to-analog/analog-to-digital converter.
- the phase shifter setting in the analog domain determines the direction of the beam after beamforming. Since the signal is directly combined as an electrical signal in the analog domain, it is impossible to use digital signal processing weighting like DBF.
- ABF must pre-configure the phase shifter setting during transmission and reception (that is, point the analog beam to the target terminal).
- hybrid beamforming is an intermediate form between ABF and DBF.
- HBF has a certain number of digital ports to support digital beamforming, and each digital port drives an ABF subarray.
- ABF at the same array scale, the analog subarray driven by each digital channel is smaller, so the beam is wider, the reliability is better, and the beam scanning overhead is smaller.
- the ratio of HBF digital ports and analog phase shifters varies with different frequencies and system design requirements.
- the number of digital ports in the high-frequency band is very small (4 to 16), and the analog phase shifters corresponding to a single digital channel are more (16 to 32), which is closer to ABF, while the low-frequency band system has more digital ports (32 to 128) and fewer analog phase shifters (2 to 10) for a single digital channel.
- both HBF and ABF architectures have analog beams. Only when the analog beam is aligned with the communication target, the signal quality is better.
- the direction of the analog beam (determined by the beam weight) needs to be configured before sending and receiving.
- Beam scanning usually uses network equipment to send reference signals using different analog beam weights. The terminal equipment measures the reference signals respectively and feeds back its measurement results to assist the network equipment in determining the beam with the best beam quality.
- the HBF architecture has both digital ports and analog phase shifter arrays.
- FIG6 shows a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture 600 .
- the architecture 600 is the hardware structure of the network device HBF.
- the HBF architecture of the terminal device is similar to that of the network device HBF.
- the network device HBF is used as an example for explanation below.
- the architecture includes a processor 610, a memory 620, and a signal transceiver unit 630.
- the signal transceiver unit includes a transmitter 631 and a receiver 632, as well as an antenna 633. The transmitter and the receiver receive and send signals through the antenna.
- a square box represents a digital channel
- F in the square box is a digital precoding weight
- a phase shifter (circle plus oblique arrow) represents an analog channel, connecting one array or multiple arrays, that is, in practice, one phase shifter can control multiple arrays, or the phase shifter and the array can be cross-connected.
- the HBF architecture will have multiple analog beams to choose from. Under each analog beam, the weighted value and MCS of the digital port used to serve a terminal need to be fed back using CSI information, which means that the network device needs to instruct the terminal device to measure the CSI information under each analog beam separately and then provide feedback.
- This process will cause the following problems.
- the terminal device may support different feedback overheads. For network devices, different AI models need to be configured to support different reporting capabilities. Terminal devices use different AI models for compression, which will increase the storage overhead or switching overhead of network devices and terminal devices.
- the channel information corresponding to multiple analog beams needs to be measured and fed back independently.
- the feedback overhead needs to be increased N times.
- the coverage areas of multiple analog beams will overlap to a certain extent, or the channel information between multiple analog beams is correlated.
- the present application solution needs to perform joint feedback for the channel information corresponding to multiple analog beams.
- the AI model needs to support joint compression under different analog beams.
- multiple different AI models are required to support different analog beam compressions, which greatly increases the complexity of implementation and protocol design.
- the storage of multiple AI models will also lead to an increase in the storage cost of terminal devices and network devices, and switching between multiple AI models will also increase the switching overhead of network devices and terminal devices.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a method and a communication device for feeding back channel status, which can reduce the storage/switching overhead of network equipment and terminal equipment.
- the encoder is a terminal device and the decoder is a network device; or the encoder is a terminal device and the decoder is another terminal device; or the encoder is a network device and the decoder is another network device; or the encoder is a network device and the decoder is a terminal device, without limitation.
- the encoder in the following can be replaced by an encoding device, and the decoder can be replaced by a decoding device.
- the encoder in the following can include circuits other than the AI model, such as processing circuits, storage circuits, transceiver circuits, and the like.
- the encoder may deploy multiple sets of AI models, so that the encoder can encode based on the deployed AI models, such as compressing channel information; the decoder may deploy multiple sets of AI models, so that the decoder can decode based on the deployed AI models, such as recovering compressed information to obtain channel information.
- the AI model deployed by the encoder is referred to as the AI model of the encoder
- the AI model deployed by the decoder is referred to as the AI model of the decoder.
- Figure 7 is a schematic flow chart of a method 700 for feeding back channel status provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- method 700 is exemplarily illustrated by taking an encoder and a decoder as the execution subject of the interaction.
- the encoder can be a terminal device or a component of a terminal device (such as a chip or circuit)
- the decoder can be a network device or a component of a network device (such as a chip or circuit)
- the encoder or decoder can also be an AI node or a component of an AI node (such as a chip or circuit), without limitation.
- the method 700 shown in Figure 7 may include the following steps.
- the encoder compresses M channel information to obtain a first sequence.
- the M channel information is part or all of the L channel information measured by the terminal device, the L channel information corresponds to the L simulated beams, L is less than or equal to N, N is the number of channel information determined based on the reference signal on the antenna port group, and N is a positive integer.
- the N channel information corresponds to N simulated beams, and N can also be understood as the maximum number of simulated beams.
- the network device and the terminal device may predefine or predetermine the maximum number of simulated beams N and the maximum feedback overhead X for joint feedback.
- the maximum number N of simulated beams may be determined by the network device.
- the network device may configure the total number of simulated beams.
- the N simulation beams are different from each other, and there is an overlapping area in the coverage range of the N simulation beams.
- N is 5, including beam A, beam B, beam C, beam D and beam E, wherein the coverage of beam A and beam B overlaps.
- N is 5, including beam A, beam B, beam C, beam D and beam E, wherein the coverage of the five beams overlaps.
- the N simulated beams correspond to the N channel information one by one.
- the N channel information is the channel information of the N simulated beams.
- the channel information may be channel state information CSI.
- CSI channel state information
- the N channel information corresponds to N serial numbers
- the N serial numbers correspond one-to-one to the N simulated beams.
- the N simulated beams are associated with the N channel information through the N serial numbers.
- N is 3, and the three simulated beams are beam A, beam B, and beam C, beam A corresponds to serial number 1, beam B corresponds to serial number 2, and beam C corresponds to serial number 3.
- channel information A corresponds to serial number 1
- channel information B corresponds to serial number 2
- channel information C corresponds to serial number 3
- channel information A corresponds to beam A
- channel information B corresponds to beam B
- channel information C corresponds to beam C.
- the N channel information corresponds to K port groups.
- the port group may be a CSI-RS port group.
- the K port groups are used to determine K groups of channel information, and the K groups of channel information and N groups of combination coefficients determine N groups of channel information, where N is greater than or equal to K and K is a positive integer.
- the following takes the precoding matrix as an example of channel information, which can be divided into the following two cases:
- the network device configures N port groups to the terminal, and each port group corresponds to an analog beam.
- the K port groups are used to measure the channel coefficients ⁇ H 1 ,H 2 ,H 3 , ... ⁇ under N different analog beams (analog weights are ⁇ w 1 ,w 2 ,w 3 ,... ⁇ ) under the network device (such as base station) arrays A 1 ,A 2 ,D 1 ,D 2 ,(horizontal and vertical array numbers, digital port numbers).
- the terminal calculates the precoding matrices ⁇ v 1 ,v 2 ,v 3 ,... ⁇ under N different analog beams through SVD decomposition.
- N is greater than K. That is, K port groups are used to determine N groups of channel coefficients.
- K port groups are used to obtain channel coefficients (or channel responses) of the K port groups, which are denoted as h 1 , h 2 , h 3 , ..., h k .
- the channel coefficients under N simulated beams can be obtained
- the terminal calculates the precoding matrices ⁇ v 1 ,v 2 ,v 3 ,... ⁇ under N different simulated beams through SVD decomposition.
- the N channel information are N precoding matrices
- the N channel information are decomposed according to the channel coefficients of N analog beams, or the N channel information are decomposed according to the channel information of K port groups and the channel combination coefficients.
- the terminal device can measure L channel information and compress and feedback M of the channel information.
- the network device or the terminal device may determine to report M channel information and corresponding feedback overhead Y, where the M channel information corresponds to M simulated beams.
- the network device or the terminal device may determine to feedback M channel information and the corresponding feedback overhead Y according to the priority information.
- the priority information may be the priorities corresponding to the L simulated beams.
- the network device determines M channel information and corresponding feedback overhead Y according to the priorities corresponding to the L simulated beams.
- the network device may indicate to the terminal device the correspondence between the M channel information and the N channel information.
- the terminal report can determine M channel information and corresponding feedback overhead Y based on the priorities corresponding to L simulated beams configured based on the network device and the measurement results of the L simulated beams.
- the terminal device may indicate the correspondence between the M channel information and the N channel information to the network device.
- the measurement results of the L channel information include but are not limited to CQI, RSRP measurement, etc.
- the first sequence is a compression result of M channel information
- the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to N channel information.
- the first sequence is a joint feedback amount of N channel information dimensions.
- the first sequence can indicate N channel information.
- the first sequence includes N channel information.
- the first sequence may be a sequence before quantization.
- the first sequence is a one-dimensional real number/complex number sequence.
- the first sequence may be a quantized sequence.
- the first sequence includes X bits.
- the joint feedback amount is exemplified by taking bit overhead as an example, but is not limited in any way.
- the input and output results of the AI model are fixed, so the input of the encoder is fixed to a precoding matrix of N simulated beam dimensions. Similarly, the output of the encoder outputs an output matrix of N simulated beam dimensions.
- the input of the encoder is channel information of N beam dimensions.
- a joint feedback amount of X bits of overhead is obtained.
- channel information of N beam dimensions is reconstructed.
- the stacking method of the channel information can be predefined, or in other words, the stacking method of the input matrices corresponding to different analog beams can be predefined.
- the stacking method can be understood as the analog beams corresponding to the channel information to be compressed are input into the input matrix of N analog beam dimensions in a certain order or arrangement.
- the input/output end of the encoder or decoder requires partial input or output, and the corresponding relationship between the input end and the output end can be guaranteed according to a certain arrangement rule or position rule, thereby ensuring the performance of joint compression and reconstruction.
- M analog beam precoding matrices are filled into the corresponding beam positions of the encoder input matrix, and the remaining unfilled positions can be filled into the input matrix by inputting a fixed amount to obtain the input matrix under N beam dimensions and send it to the encoder for joint compression to obtain the full feedback amount under X bits.
- N channel information define logical sequence numbers Beam1-Beam N and are bound to the positions of N analog beams in a physical sense, and the encoder input end defines the stacking arrangement of the N analog beam channel information; then, the N channel information is input into the encoder, and the decoder output end defines the stacking arrangement of the N analog beam channel information.
- Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the stacking mode of the channel information of N simulated beams at the input and output ends, wherein the arrangement order of the N simulated beams (from 1 to N) is not limited.
- the second sequence is Y joint feedback quantities corresponding to M channel information.
- the second sequence is a joint feedback amount of M channel information dimensions.
- the second sequence can indicate M channel information.
- the first sequence includes M channel information.
- the second sequence may be a sequence before quantization.
- the second sequence is a one-dimensional real number or complex number sequence.
- the second sequence may be a quantized sequence.
- the second sequence includes Y bits.
- the correspondence between the stacking positions of N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of M channel information at the encoder input end is determined according to the first sequence, and Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information are determined according to the correspondence.
- the positions of the M analog beam precoding matrices filled into the N-beam input matrix are determined, or in other words, the remaining unfilled positions are excluded to obtain Y partial joint feedback amounts.
- the first sequence is the joint feedback amount of channel information in N dimensions
- the second sequence is the joint feedback amount of channel information in M dimensions.
- FIG10 shows a schematic diagram of a detachable joint feedback provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the joint feedback amount of N beams consists of N+1 parts, where the first N parts ⁇ X 1 , X 2 , ..., X N ⁇ represent the specific characteristics of the N simulated beams, and the N+1 part X com represents the common characteristics of the N simulated beams. If the terminal needs to report the channel information of some beams, it only needs to report the feedback amount corresponding to the unique characteristics of the partial beams and the common characteristics of the N simulated beams.
- the first sequence includes Xbits joint feedback amounts corresponding to N beams, and the Xbits joint feedback amount is composed of the first feature and the second feature corresponding to the N channel information, or in other words, the first sequence includes N first features and O second features.
- the first feature indicates a specific feature of each channel information
- the second feature indicates a common feature of the N channel information.
- the second sequence includes Ybits of joint feedback corresponding to M beams, and the Ybits of joint feedback consists of the first feature and the second feature corresponding to the M channel information, or in other words, the first sequence includes M first features and P second features.
- the first feature indicates a specific feature of each channel information
- the second feature indicates a common feature of the M channel information.
- P is less than or equal to O, and O can be 1.
- M first features are determined from N first features based on a correspondence between the stacking positions of N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of M channel information at the encoder input end
- P second features corresponding to the M channel information are determined from O second features based on a correspondence between the stacking positions of N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of M channel information at the encoder input end
- a second sequence is determined based on the M first features and the P second features.
- the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence
- the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence.
- M simulated beams when M simulated beams are filled into an input matrix of N simulated beam dimensions, they are filled in a certain regular order, so The M simulated beams have a corresponding relationship in the input matrix of N simulated beam dimensions.
- the first features and the second features corresponding to the M beams also have a corresponding relationship with the first features and the second features of the N beam dimensions.
- the N first features and the O second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component, wherein the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information, and the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information.
- the feature supplement component for a first feature or a second feature may include multiple feature supplement components, and feature supplement components with different feedback numbers indicate different feedback accuracies.
- each of the M first features includes a feature principal component
- some or all of the M first features include feature supplementary components
- each of the P second features includes a feature principal component
- some or all of the P second features include feature supplementary components.
- the accuracies corresponding to the M channel information fed back can all be high precision, that is, the main component and supplementary component of the first feature and the main component and supplementary component of the second feature corresponding to the M channel information are fed back, or part of it can be high precision, that is, the main component and supplementary component of the first feature and the main component and supplementary component of the second feature corresponding to part of the channel information are fed back, and the other part of the channel information only feeds back the corresponding main component of the first feature and the main component of the second feature.
- the present application does not limit this.
- high-precision feedback can also feed back different numbers of supplementary components for different channel information to achieve feedback at different precision levels.
- the feedback amount corresponding to each feature is composed of the main component of the feature and the supplementary components of Q features (Q ⁇ 1) to support feedback of Q+1 accuracy levels.
- the main component can independently complete the reconstruction of the part of the channel information, and the supplementary component serves as a high-precision supplement to the part of the channel information.
- the characteristic principal component of each of the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the M first features; the supplementary component of each of the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each of the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each of the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each of the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each of the P second features.
- the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence
- the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence. Accordingly, for the features in the first sequence (the first feature and the second feature) and the features in the second sequence (the first feature and the second feature) that have a corresponding relationship, the feature principal components and feature supplementary components included in each also have a corresponding relationship.
- the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information can be determined by the network device or by the terminal device.
- the network device may determine the accuracy categories corresponding to the M channel information according to the priorities of the L channel information.
- the terminal device may determine the accuracy categories corresponding to the M channel information based on the measurement results of the L channel information and/or the priority information of the L channel information.
- the terminal can give priority to reporting the unique characteristic principal components and common characteristic principal components of the M simulated beams to ensure that the decoder can complete the reconstruction of the complete channel information of the M simulated beams; then, the encoder can report the supplementary components of the simulated beams based on the different priorities of the simulated beams to achieve feedback with higher accuracy.
- the encoder sends the second sequence to the decoder.
- the decoder receives the second sequence.
- the decoder determines the first sequence according to the second sequence.
- the input and output of the encoder and decoder are matrices of fixed N beam dimensions, that is, at the input of the decoder, the joint feedback amount of M channel information needs to be restored to the joint feedback amount corresponding to N channel information.
- a correspondence between stacking positions of M channel information at a decoder input and stacking positions of N channel information at a decoder input is determined, and X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information are determined according to the correspondence.
- the corresponding beam position relationship of the beam input matrix is determined, and the corresponding relationship between the stacking position of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking position of the N channel information is determined.
- the M analog beam coding matrices are filled to the position of the N beam input matrix, and the beam position corresponding to the non-feedback part is filled with a fixed amount, so that the full feedback amount of X can be obtained.
- N first features and O second features are determined based on the correspondence between the stacking positions of N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of M channel information at the encoder input end, and X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information are determined based on the M first features and the P second features.
- the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence
- the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence.
- M simulated beams when M simulated beams are filled into an input matrix of N simulated beam dimensions, they are filled in a certain regular order. Therefore, the M simulated beams have a corresponding relationship in the input matrix of N simulated beam dimensions.
- the first features and the second features corresponding to the M beams also have a corresponding relationship with the first features and the second features of the N beam dimensions.
- the M first features and the P second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component, wherein the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information, and the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information.
- the feature supplement component for a first feature or a second feature may include multiple feature supplement components, and feature supplement components with different feedback numbers indicate different feedback accuracies.
- each of the N first features includes a feature principal component
- some or all of the N first features include a feature supplementary component
- each of the O second features includes the feature principal component
- some or all of the O second features include the feature supplementary component.
- the accuracies corresponding to the M channel information actually fed back can all be high-precision, that is, the main component and supplementary component of the first feature and the main component and supplementary component of the second feature corresponding to the M channel information are fed back, or part of it can be high-precision, that is, the main component and supplementary component of the first feature and the main component and supplementary component of the second feature corresponding to part of the channel information are fed back, and the other part of the channel information only feeds back the corresponding main component of the first feature and the main component of the second feature.
- the present application does not limit this.
- the characteristic principal component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the supplementary component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the P second features.
- the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence
- the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence. Accordingly, for the features in the first sequence (the first feature and the second feature) and the features in the second sequence (the first feature and the second feature) that have a corresponding relationship, the feature principal components and feature supplementary components included in each also have a corresponding relationship.
- the accuracy levels corresponding to the reported M channel information may be the same or different, and the present application does not limit this.
- the accuracy level corresponding to the reported M channel information may be determined by a network device or a terminal device.
- the terminal can give priority to reporting the unique characteristic principal components and common characteristic principal components of the M simulated beams, and the decoder completes the reconstruction of the complete channel information of the M simulated beams based on the reported unique characteristic principal components and common characteristic principal components of the M simulated beams; then, the encoder reports the supplementary components of the simulated beams based on the different priorities of the simulated beams, and the decoder can further reconstruct the corresponding channel information based on the supplementary components corresponding to the M simulated beams, thereby achieving higher-precision reconstruction of the channel information.
- the decoder reconstructs the first sequence to obtain M channel information.
- the matrix of N simulated beam dimensions corresponding to the first sequence is input to the decoder, and the decoder reconstructs the first sequence to obtain an output matrix of N simulated beam dimensions.
- the decoder selects information of beam positions corresponding to the M channel information from the output matrix according to the correspondence between the stacking positions of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking positions of the N channel information at the decoder input end, thereby obtaining an output matrix of the M channel information.
- the decoder reconstructs the input matrix of N analog beam dimensions and obtains the output matrix corresponding to N analog beam dimensions.
- the input matrix of N analog beam dimensions includes the input matrix of M analog beams and NM fixed quantities. Therefore, in order to obtain the output matrix of M analog beams, it is necessary to stack the M channel information at the decoder input end according to the stacking position of the M channel information and the N channel information.
- the M channel information is intercepted according to the corresponding relationship of the stacking position of the information at the decoder input end. It can also be said that a fixed amount of channel information is eliminated according to the corresponding relationship, so as to obtain the channel information corresponding to the M simulated beams.
- the AI model can be used to jointly compress the channel information of N simulated beams of fixed dimension and feed it back to the decoder.
- the decoder uses the AI model to reconstruct the channel information of N simulated beams, wherein the encoder can carry M channel information through the input matrix corresponding to the N simulated beams of fixed dimension, thereby realizing the compression and feedback of partial channel information, avoiding the storage/switching overhead of multiple AI models and reducing the complexity of implementation; in addition, the priority of partial feedback is defined to ensure the efficiency and reliability of multi-beam reporting; further, for the M channel information of compressed feedback, the accuracy of the corresponding channel information can be fed back through the characteristic principal component and characteristic supplementary component corresponding to each channel information, thereby realizing that different simulated beams can be reported with different accuracies, increasing the flexibility of the feedback mechanism.
- Figure 11 is a schematic flow chart of a method for feeding back channel status provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- method 1100 is exemplarily illustrated by taking a network device and a terminal device as the execution subject of the interaction.
- the encoder and the decoder can be deployed on the terminal device and the network device, respectively.
- the encoder or decoder can also be an AI node or a component of an AI node (such as a chip or circuit), without limitation.
- the method 1100 shown in Figure 11 may include the following steps.
- the network device sends configuration information to the terminal device.
- the configuration information may include reference signal configuration information and channel information reporting configuration information.
- the reference signal configuration information may include information related to reference signal port grouping and information related to reference signal resource grouping.
- the number of ports in each port group is exactly the same, for example, the number of ports in each port group is PCSI-RS .
- the reference signal resource grouping may be CSI-RS port group #1, CSI-RS port group #2, ..., CSI-RS port group #K.
- the reference signal port group is used as an example to describe the reference signal.
- this solution is also applicable to the scenario of reference signal resource grouping. This application does not limit this.
- the channel information reporting configuration information may include the content of reporting and measurement and the number of reporting and measurement.
- the number of reports and measurements may be the number L of measured channel information, where L is less than or equal to N.
- N simulated beams are used as the maximum number of simulated beams for joint feedback
- X joint overhead is used as the maximum feedback amount for joint feedback.
- the determination of the maximum number of simulated beams and the maximum joint feedback amount can refer to step 710 in method 700, and this application does not limit this.
- the network device determines the number of simulated beams M and the feedback overhead Y that need to be reported.
- the network device determines the reported number of simulated beams M and the feedback overhead Y based on the priority of the joint feedback of each simulated beam.
- L can be equal to M, and the network device can send the measured correspondence between M simulated beams and N simulated beams and the feedback overhead Y to the terminal device.
- the terminal device determines the number of simulated beams M and the feedback overhead Y to be reported.
- the terminal device measures L channel information and determines M reported simulated beams and feedback overhead Y according to the priority of joint feedback (for example, based on CQI/RSRP measurement).
- L is less than or equal to the maximum number of simulated beams N
- M is less than or equal to L.
- the terminal device can report the correspondence between the M simulated beams and the N simulated beams determined by itself, as well as its feedback overhead Y to the network device.
- the configuration information may also include a CSI-RS transmission method and/or a relationship between a CSI-RS port group and multi-analog beam channel information (see 1120 below for details).
- the configuration information may also include other content, which is not limited in this application.
- the network device sends a reference signal to the terminal device.
- the network device sends a reference signal to the terminal device through the resources configured by the reference signal configuration information.
- the reference signal takes CSI-RS as an example, which is not limited in the present application.
- the CSI-RS is sent on the resources configured by the resource configuration information.
- different CSI-RS port groups are sent in a time division manner, that is, different CSI-RS port groups are sent on different time domain resources (eg, time slots or OFDM symbols).
- the CSI-RS port group is sent in a time-division manner, which can facilitate the sending of multiple reference signals based on different simulated beams under the HBF architecture. number to realize the measurement of channel information.
- different CSI-RS port groups may be sent in a frequency division manner, that is, different CSI-RS port groups are sent on different frequency domain resources (e.g., component carriers, resource blocks, or different subcarriers). For example, CSI-RS port group #1 is sent based on the first analog beam; and CSI-RS port group #2 is sent based on the second analog beam.
- different frequency domain resources e.g., component carriers, resource blocks, or different subcarriers
- the CSI-RS port group is sent in a frequency division manner, so that the network device can quickly scan the channel information.
- different CSI-RS port groups may be sent in a code division manner, for example, CSI-RS port group #1 is sent based on a first analog beam; and CSI-RS port group #2 is sent based on a second analog beam orthogonal to the first analog beam.
- the CSI-RS port group is sent in a code division manner, which can be used for network devices in the HBF architecture to quickly scan channel information.
- the time-frequency ranges of multiple CSI-RS port groups may be limited.
- the network equipment configures CSI-RS port groups #1 to K respectively, and multiple port groups need to be limited to the same frequency domain (but can still be located in different resource units of the same resource block) and occupy the same bandwidth; and multiple port groups are located in the same time slot or adjacent time slots, and the time slot interval of multiple CSI-RS port groups does not exceed t.
- the terminal device measures information of L simulated beam channels.
- the terminal device receives K CSI-RS port groups, reports configuration information based on CSI-RS and channel information, and obtains the precoding matrix under L simulated beams.
- the following takes the precoding matrix as an example of channel information, which can be divided into the following two cases:
- the network device configures L port groups to the terminal, and each port group corresponds to an analog beam.
- the K port groups are used to measure the channel coefficients ⁇ H 1 ,H 2 ,H 3 , ... ⁇ under L different analog beams (analog weights are ⁇ w 1 ,w 2 ,w 3 ,... ⁇ ) under the network device (such as base station) arrays A 1 ,A 2 ,D 1 ,D 2 (horizontal and vertical array numbers, digital port numbers), and the terminal device then calculates the precoding matrices ⁇ v 1 , v 2 ,v 3 ,... ⁇ under the L different analog beams through SVD decomposition.
- Case 2 L is greater than K. That is, K port groups are used to determine L groups of channel coefficients.
- K port groups are used to obtain channel coefficients (or channel responses) of the K port groups, which are recorded as h 1 , h 2 , h 3 , ..., h k .
- the channel coefficients under L simulated beams can be obtained
- the terminal device calculates the precoding matrices ⁇ v 1 ,v 2 ,v 3 ,... ⁇ under L different simulated beams through SVD decomposition.
- the L channel information are L precoding matrices
- the L channel information are decomposed according to the channel coefficients of the L analog beams, or the L channel information are decomposed according to the channel information of the K port groups and the channel combination coefficients.
- the terminal device can measure L channel information and compress and feedback M of the channel information.
- case 2 can obtain more channel information with fewer reference signals.
- the base station can use K groups of orthogonal analog weights ⁇ W 1 ,W 2 ,W 3 ,... ⁇ , and send K CSI-RS port groups simultaneously through different antenna groups, so as to obtain the channel information corresponding to the K analog ports; and in the terminal device, by weighting the analog port channels (i.e., It can be equivalent to a simulated beam), so that the channel information of L>K simulated beams can be obtained.
- the terminal device measures the encrypted beam channel information.
- the terminal device jointly compresses the channel information of the M analog beams to obtain a precoding matrix of the M analog beams.
- the terminal device can determine the channel information of M simulated beams from the measured channel information of L simulated beams, that is, select the channel information of M simulated beams to be reported, and calculate the precoding matrix of the M simulated beams through SVD.
- the channel information of the M simulated beams may be determined from the channel information of the L simulated beams in the following exemplary manner.
- the reported M analog beams and their feedback overhead Y may be determined by the network device based on the priorities of the L analog beams.
- the network device may indicate the correspondence between the M channel information and the N channel information to the terminal device.
- the terminal device report can determine M channel information and corresponding feedback overhead Y based on the priorities corresponding to L simulated beams configured based on the network device and the measurement results of the L simulated beams.
- the terminal device may indicate the correspondence between the M channel information and the N channel information to the network device.
- the measurement results of the L channel information include but are not limited to CQI, RSRP measurement, etc.
- the terminal device jointly compresses the M analog beams to obtain channel information of the M analog beams.
- Figure 12 shows a schematic diagram of a compression feedback process.
- the precoding matrix of the M simulated beams needs to be filled into the corresponding beam position of the input matrix of the N beam dimensions of the encoder.
- M is less than N
- the remaining unfilled positions can be filled with a fixed amount to obtain the input matrix of the N simulated beam dimensions, and the input matrix is input into the encoder for joint compression to obtain the full feedback amount of X bits of overhead.
- the beam positions are filled according to the stacking arrangement of the defined N simulated beam channel information, for example, the N simulated beams are arranged in the stacking manner as shown in FIG. 8 .
- the terminal device sends a joint feedback amount of M channel information.
- the encoder output end outputs an output matrix in N analog beam dimensions and X feedback quantities.
- the terminal device intercepts Y joint feedback quantities corresponding to M analog beams from the output matrix in N analog beam dimensions according to the correspondence between the stacking positions of the N analog beams and the M analog beams at the encoder input end, and feeds back the matrix corresponding to the M analog beams to the decoder, so that partial reporting can be performed.
- the terminal device can also send the correspondence between the M channel information and the N channel information.
- the network device jointly reconstructs the channel information of the M simulated beams to obtain M channel information.
- the network reports the partial beam joint feedback amount received under the Y-bit overhead, and based on the corresponding relationship between the stacking positions of the N analog beams and the M analog beams, fills the corresponding beam positions of the non-feedback part with a fixed amount to obtain the full feedback amount under the X-bit overhead, and inputs it to the decoder for joint reconstruction to obtain the output matrix under the N-beam dimension.
- the network device selects information of corresponding beam positions from the output matrix according to the correspondence between the stacking positions of the N simulated beams and the M simulated beams to obtain the precoding matrix of the reported M simulated beams.
- the terminal device may also determine the feedback accuracies corresponding to the M simulated beams.
- the feedback accuracy is configured by the network device to the terminal device based on the priority information of the L simulated beams, or it can be determined by the terminal device according to the measurement results and priority information.
- the terminal device can feed back different accuracies for different analog beams, thereby achieving the purpose of flexible feedback.
- the Z-bit feedback amount is sent to the decoder.
- the low-precision joint feedback amount is padded with a fixed amount at the corresponding supplementary component position to obtain X full feedback amounts and input them into the decoder for joint reconstruction to obtain a low-precision precoding matrix of M analog beams.
- the channel information of the partial beam is input on the encoder side according to the correspondence between the beam positions of the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount, thereby realizing compression and feedback of the partial channel information, avoiding the storage/switching overhead of multiple AI models and reducing the complexity of implementation; in addition, the priority of partial feedback is defined to ensure the efficiency and reliability of multi-beam reporting; further, for the M channel information of compressed feedback, the accuracy of the corresponding channel information can be fed back through the characteristic principal component and characteristic supplementary component corresponding to each channel information, thereby realizing that different simulation beams can be reported with different accuracies, increasing the flexibility of the feedback mechanism.
- sequence numbers of the above processes do not mean the order of execution.
- the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
- each network element such as a transmitting end device or a receiving end device, includes a hardware structure and/or software module corresponding to the execution of each function in order to realize the above functions.
- the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to exceed the scope of this application.
- the embodiment of the present application can divide the functional modules of the transmitting end device or the receiving end device according to the above method example.
- each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
- the above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical functional division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation. The following is an example of dividing each functional module corresponding to each function.
- FIG13 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the device 1300 includes a transceiver unit 1310 and a processing unit 1320, wherein the transceiver unit 1310 can be used to implement corresponding communication functions, and the processing unit 1320 can be used to perform data processing.
- the transceiver unit 1310 may also be referred to as a communication interface or a communication unit, including a sending unit and/or a receiving unit.
- the transceiver unit 1310 may be a transceiver (including a transmitter and/or a receiver), an input/output interface (including an input and/or output interface), a pin or a circuit, etc.
- the transceiver unit 1310 may be used to perform the steps of sending and/or receiving in the above method embodiment.
- the processing unit 1320 may be a processor (may include one or more), a processing circuit with a processor function, etc., and may be used to execute other steps except sending and receiving in the above method embodiment.
- the device 1300 further includes a storage unit, which may be a memory, an internal storage unit (e.g., a register, a cache, etc.), an external storage unit (e.g., a read-only memory, a random access memory, etc.), etc.
- the storage unit is used to store instructions, and the processing unit 1320 executes the instructions stored in the storage unit so that the communication device executes the above method.
- the device 1300 may be used to perform the actions performed by the encoder in the above method embodiments, such as the device 1300 may be used to perform the actions performed by the encoder in the above method 700 or method 1100.
- the device 1300 may be a component of the encoder
- the transceiver unit 1310 is used to perform the transceiver-related operations of the encoder in the above method embodiments
- the processing unit 1320 is used to perform the processing-related operations of the encoder in the above method embodiments.
- the processing unit 1320 is used to compress M channel information to obtain a first sequence, where the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, L is less than or equal to N, N is the number of channel information determined based on reference signals on K antenna port groups, N is a positive integer, and the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information; the processing unit 1320 is also used to determine a second sequence based on the first sequence, where the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information; the transceiver unit 1310 is used to send the second sequence to the decoder.
- the processing unit 1320 is further used to determine the correspondence between the stacking positions of the N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of the M channel information at the encoder input end; the processing unit is also used to determine Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information based on the correspondence.
- the processing unit 1320 is further configured to determine accuracy levels corresponding to the M channel information.
- transceiver unit 1310 and the processing unit 1320 may also perform other operations performed by the encoder in any of the above methods 700 or 1100, which will not be described in detail here.
- the device 1300 may be used to perform the actions performed by the decoder in the above method embodiments, such as the device 1300 may be used to perform the actions performed by the decoder in the above method 700 or method 1100.
- the device 1300 may be a component of the decoder
- the transceiver unit 1310 is used to perform the transceiver-related operations on the decoder side in the above method embodiments
- the processing unit 1320 is used to perform the processing-related operations on the decoder side in the above method embodiments.
- the transceiver unit 1310 is used to receive a second sequence, where the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to M channel information, where the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, where L is less than or equal to N, where N is the number of channel information determined based on reference signals on K antenna port groups, and N is a positive integer; the processing unit 1320 is used to determine a first sequence according to the second sequence, where the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information; and the processing unit 1320 is also used to reconstruct the first sequence to obtain the M channel information.
- the processing unit 1320 is further used to determine the correspondence between the stacking positions of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking positions of the N channel information at the decoder input end; the processing unit is also used to determine X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information according to the correspondence.
- the processing unit 1320 is further configured to determine accuracy levels corresponding to the M channel information.
- the processing unit 1320 is further configured to determine the stacking position of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the N channel information at the decoder input end.
- the processing unit 1320 is further configured to determine the M channel information according to the corresponding relationship.
- transceiver unit 1310 and the processing unit 1320 may also execute other operations performed by the terminal device in any of the above-mentioned methods 700 or 1100, which are not described in detail here.
- the device 1300 here is embodied in the form of a functional unit.
- the term "unit” here may refer to an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an electronic circuit, a processor (such as a shared processor, a dedicated processor or a group processor, etc.) and a memory for executing one or more software or firmware programs, a combined logic circuit and/or other suitable components that support the described functions.
- ASIC application specific integrated circuit
- the device 1300 can be specifically a network device in the above-mentioned embodiments, and can be used to execute the various processes and/or steps corresponding to the network device in the above-mentioned method embodiments. To avoid repetition, it will not be repeated here.
- the apparatus 1300 of each of the above-mentioned schemes has the function of implementing the corresponding steps executed by the device in the above-mentioned method, or the apparatus 1300 of each of the above-mentioned schemes has the function of implementing the corresponding steps executed by the network device in the above-mentioned method.
- the function can be implemented by hardware, or the corresponding software can be implemented by hardware.
- the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions; for example, the transceiver unit can be replaced by a transceiver (for example, the sending unit in the transceiver unit can be replaced by a transmitter, and the receiving unit in the transceiver unit can be replaced by a receiver), and other units, such as the processing unit, can be replaced by a processor to respectively perform the sending and receiving operations and related processing operations in each method embodiment.
- the transceiver unit can be replaced by a transceiver (for example, the sending unit in the transceiver unit can be replaced by a transmitter, and the receiving unit in the transceiver unit can be replaced by a receiver), and other units, such as the processing unit, can be replaced by a processor to respectively perform the sending and receiving operations and related processing operations in each method embodiment.
- the transceiver unit 1310 may also be a transceiver circuit (for example, may include a receiving circuit and a sending circuit), and the processing unit may be a processing circuit.
- the device in FIG. 13 may be a network element or device in the aforementioned embodiment, or may be a chip or a chip system, such as a system on chip (SoC).
- the transceiver unit may be an input and output circuit or a communication interface; the processing unit may be a processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip. This is not limited here.
- Figure 14 is a schematic diagram of a communication architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device 1400 shown in Figure 14 includes: a processor 1410, a memory 1420 and a transceiver 1430.
- the processor 1410 is coupled to the memory 1420 and is used to execute instructions stored in the memory 1420 to control the transceiver 1430 to send and/or receive signals.
- processor 1410 and the memory 1420 can be combined into a processing device, and the processor 1410 is used to execute the program code stored in the memory 1420 to implement the above functions.
- the memory 1420 can also be integrated into the processor 1410, or independent of the processor 1410.
- the processor 1410 can also correspond to each processing unit in the above communication device, and the transceiver 1430 can correspond to each receiving unit and sending unit in the above communication device.
- the transceiver 1430 may include a receiver (or receiver) and a transmitter (or transmitter).
- the transceiver may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
- the transceiver may also be a communication interface or interface circuit.
- the communication device 1400 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 700 or the method 1100 according to the embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device 1400 may include a unit of the method performed by the encoder in the method 700 or the method 1100. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the above corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above method embodiment, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
- the chip When the communication device 1400 is a chip, the chip includes an interface unit and a processing unit, wherein the interface unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface; and the processing unit may be a processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
- the interface unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface
- the processing unit may be a processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
- each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
- the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiment of the present application can be directly embodied as a hardware processor for execution, or a combination of hardware and software modules in a processor for execution.
- the software module can be located in a storage medium mature in the art such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory or an electrically erasable programmable memory, a register, etc.
- the storage medium is located in a memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in conjunction with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it is not described in detail here.
- the processor in the embodiment of the present application can be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
- each step of the above method embodiment can be completed by the hardware integrated logic circuit in the processor or the instructions in the form of software.
- the above processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
- DSP digital signal processor
- ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
- FPGA field programmable gate array
- the various methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
- the general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor or the processor can also be any conventional processor, etc.
- the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiment of the present application can be directly embodied as a hardware decoding processor for execution, or can be executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
- the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory or an electrically erasable programmable memory, a register, etc.
- the storage medium is located in a memory,
- the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
- the present application also provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored.
- a computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the functions of any of the above method embodiments are implemented.
- the present application also provides a computer program product, which implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments when executed by a computer.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
- the computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
- the computer instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
- the computer instructions can be transmitted from a website site, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (digital subscriber line, DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) mode to another website site, computer, server or data center.
- the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated.
- the available medium may be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (e.g., a high-density digital video disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., a solid state disk (SSD)), etc.
- a magnetic medium e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape
- an optical medium e.g., a high-density digital video disc (DVD)
- DVD high-density digital video disc
- SSD solid state disk
- the size of the sequence number of each process does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
- the names of all nodes and messages in this application are merely names set by this application for the convenience of description. The names in the actual network may be different. It should not be understood that this application limits the names of various nodes and messages. On the contrary, any name with the same or similar function as the node or message used in this application is regarded as the method or equivalent replacement of this application, and is within the scope of protection of this application.
- system and “network” are often used interchangeably in this article.
- the term “and/or” in this article is only a description of the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships.
- a and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone.
- At least one of! or “at least one of" herein refers to all or any combination of the listed items.
- at least one of A, B, and C may refer to the following six situations: A exists alone, B exists alone, C exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, B and C exist at the same time, and A, B, and C exist at the same time.
- At least one herein refers to one or more.
- “More than one” refers to two or more.
- the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only schematic, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
- Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of the present application can be essentially or partly embodied in the form of a software product that contributes to the prior art.
- the computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions for a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in each embodiment of the present application.
- the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk, and other media that can store program codes.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Radio Relay Systems (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请要求在2023年9月28日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202311292016.X、发明名称为“用于反馈信道状态的方法及通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to a Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on September 28, 2023, with application number 202311292016.X and invention name “Method and communication device for feedback of channel status”, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
本申请涉及通信技术的领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种用于反馈信道状态的方法及通信装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and more specifically, to a method and a communication device for feeding back channel status.
在通信系统中,网络设备需要获取终端设备反馈的下行信道信息,以便对下行方向的数据进行预编码等处理。目前的反馈机制中,网络设备可以向终端设备发送参考信号,终端设备根据参考信号确定信道,然后反馈对应的信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI),例如可以包括预编码信息、信道支持的传输流数(即信道的秩)以及信道质量指示(Channel quality indicator,CQI),用于反馈当前信道质量下终端设备推荐的调制编码方案(modulation coding scheme,MCS)。In a communication system, network equipment needs to obtain downlink channel information fed back by terminal equipment in order to perform precoding and other processing on downlink data. In the current feedback mechanism, network equipment can send a reference signal to the terminal equipment, the terminal equipment determines the channel based on the reference signal, and then feeds back the corresponding channel state information (CSI), which may include, for example, precoding information, the number of transmission streams supported by the channel (i.e., the rank of the channel), and the channel quality indicator (CQI), which is used to feed back the modulation coding scheme (MCS) recommended by the terminal equipment under the current channel quality.
终端设备在上报时,例如在多输入多输出(multiple-input multiple-output,MIMO)系统中,为了节省预编码矩阵的反馈开销,终端设备可以对预编码信息进行压缩再进行上报,例如,网络设备/终端设备可以基于AI模型来设计并训练自编码器,进行空频双域的压缩。When the terminal device reports, for example in a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) system, in order to save the feedback overhead of the precoding matrix, the terminal device can compress the precoding information before reporting. For example, the network device/terminal device can design and train an autoencoder based on an AI model to perform space-frequency dual-domain compression.
在高频段的通信系统中,网络设备使用不同模拟波束权值发送参考信号,终端设备分别对参考信号进行测量,反馈各参考信号的测量结果。针对不同上报能力的终端设备,网络设备需要配置不同的AI模型来支持不同的上报能力,从而导致网络设备和终端设备的存储/切换开销增加。In high-frequency communication systems, network devices use different analog beam weights to send reference signals, and terminal devices measure the reference signals separately and feedback the measurement results of each reference signal. For terminal devices with different reporting capabilities, network devices need to be configured with different AI models to support different reporting capabilities, which increases the storage/switching overhead of network devices and terminal devices.
因此,亟需一种用于反馈信道状态的方法,以期降低网络设备和终端设备的存储/切换开销。Therefore, there is an urgent need for a method for feeding back channel status in order to reduce the storage/switching overhead of network devices and terminal devices.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种用于反馈信道状态的方法及通信装置,能够降低网络设备和终端设备的存储/切换开销。The present application provides a method and a communication device for feeding back channel status, which can reduce the storage/switching overhead of network equipment and terminal equipment.
第一方面,提供了一种用于反馈信道状态的方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由配置于终端设备中的编码器执行,本申请对此不作限定。In a first aspect, a method for feeding back a channel status is provided. The method may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by an encoder configured in the terminal device, and the present application does not limit this.
该方法包括:对M个信道信息进行压缩,得到第一序列,所述M个信道信息为测量的L个信道信息的部分或全部,L小于或者等于N,N为基于K个天线端口组上的参考信号决定的信道信息的个数,所述第一序列为对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量,M、L和N为正整数;根据所述第一序列确定第二序列,所述第二序列为对应所述M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量;向解码器发送所述第二序列。The method comprises: compressing M channel information to obtain a first sequence, wherein the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, L is less than or equal to N, N is the number of channel information determined based on reference signals on K antenna port groups, the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information, M, L and N are positive integers; determining a second sequence according to the first sequence, the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information; and sending the second sequence to a decoder.
其中,N个信道信息对应N个模拟波束,N也可以理解为最大模拟波束的个数。Among them, N channel information corresponds to N simulation beams, and N can also be understood as the maximum number of simulation beams.
该N个模拟波束互不相同,该N个模拟波束的覆盖范围存在重叠区域。The N simulated beams are different from each other, and there is an overlapping area in the coverage range of the N simulated beams.
本申请中,网络设备和终端设备可以预定义或预先确定联合反馈的最大模拟波束个数N与最大反馈开销X。In the present application, the network device and the terminal device may predefine or predetermine the maximum number of simulated beams N and the maximum feedback overhead X for joint feedback.
可以理解的是,终端设备可以对L个信道信息进行测量,并对其中的M个信道信息进行压缩反馈。It can be understood that the terminal device can measure L channel information and compress and feedback M of the channel information.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备可以对最大模拟波束范围内的多个模拟波束进行部分测量及部分压缩反馈,避免了AI模型的存储/切换开销,降低了实现的复杂度。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can perform partial measurement and partial compression feedback on multiple simulated beams within the maximum simulated beam range, avoiding the storage/switching overhead of the AI model and reducing the complexity of implementation.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,当所述第一序列或第二序列为量化前的序列时,所述联合反馈量为所述第一序列或所述第二序列的长度,或者,当所述第一序列或所述第二序列为量化后的序列时,所述联合反馈量为所述第一序列或所述第二序列的比特数量。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence before quantization, the joint feedback amount is the length of the first sequence or the second sequence, or, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence after quantization, the joint feedback amount is the number of bits of the first sequence or the second sequence.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,确定所述N个信道信息在所述编码器输入端的堆叠位置与所述M个信道信息在所述编码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系;根据所述对应关系确定对应所述M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation method, the correspondence between the stacking positions of the N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of the M channel information at the encoder input end is determined; and Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information are determined based on the correspondence.
该技术方案中,定义了编码器侧输入端的部分反馈量与全反馈量的波束位置对应关系,基于该对应 关系可以从编码器输出端输出的全反馈量的矩阵确定出M个信道信息对应的部分反馈量的矩阵,从而实现部分信道信息的压缩和反馈。In this technical solution, the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the encoder input end is defined. The relationship can determine the matrix of partial feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information from the matrix of the full feedback amount output from the encoder output end, thereby realizing compression and feedback of partial channel information.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第一序列包括N个第一特征和O个第二特征,所述N个第一特征与所述N个信道信息对应,所述第一特征指示所述各信道信息的特定特征,所述O个第二特征指示所述N个信道信息的公共特征,所述根据所述对应关系确定对应所述M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量,包括:根据所述对应关系和所述N个第一特征确定M个第一特征,所述M个第一特征与所述M个信道信息对应;根据所述对应关系和所述O个第二特征确定所述M个信道信息对应的P个第二特征,P小于或者等于O,O和P为正整数;根据所述M个第一特征和所述P个第二特征确定对应所述M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first sequence includes N first features and O second features, the N first features correspond to the N channel information, the first features indicate a specific feature of each channel information, and the O second features indicate a common feature of the N channel information, and determining Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information according to the corresponding relationship includes: determining M first features according to the corresponding relationship and the N first features, the M first features corresponding to the M channel information; determining P second features corresponding to the M channel information according to the corresponding relationship and the O second features, where P is less than or equal to O, and O and P are positive integers; and determining Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information according to the M first features and the P second features.
该技术方案中,将N个信道信息中的公共特征和特有特征分别定义,从而可以实现可拆分的联合反馈,通过部分反馈的方式,支持不同模拟波束数及不同反馈开销下的信道信息的反馈。In this technical solution, the common features and unique features in N channel information are defined separately, so that separable joint feedback can be achieved. Through partial feedback, feedback of channel information under different numbers of simulated beams and different feedback overheads is supported.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征在所述第一序列中的位置与所述M个第一特征在所述第二序列中的位置具有对应关系,所述O个第二特征在所述第一序列中的位置与所述P个第二特征在所述第二序列中的位置具有对应关系。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence, and the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence.
该技术方案中,定义了不同模拟波束特征与全反馈量位置对应关系。In this technical solution, the corresponding relationship between different simulated beam characteristics and the position of the total feedback amount is defined.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征和所述O个第二特征包括特征主分量和特征补充分量,所述特征主分量用于完成所述信道信息的重构,所述特征补充分量用于对所述信道信息的精度进行补充。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the N first features and the O second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component, the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information, and the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information.
该技术方案中,通过特征对应的主分量和补充分量,实现不同精度的反馈,增加了反馈的灵活度。In this technical solution, feedback of different accuracies is achieved through the principal component and supplementary component corresponding to the feature, thereby increasing the flexibility of the feedback.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个第一特征中的每一个第一特征包括所述特征主分量,所述M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征包括所述特征补充分量,所述P个第二特征中的每一个第二特征包括所述特征主分量,所述P个第二特征中的部分或全部第二特征包括所述特征补充分量。In combination with the first aspect, in one possible implementation, each of the M first features includes the feature principal component, some or all of the M first features include the feature supplementary component, each of the P second features includes the feature principal component, and some or all of the P second features include the feature supplementary component.
该技术方案中,压缩反馈的M个信道信息中,不同信道信息可以采用不同的精度进行反馈,实现了灵活反馈。In this technical solution, among the M channel information that are compressed and fed back, different channel information can be fed back with different precisions, thus achieving flexible feedback.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的特征主分量与所述M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的特征主分量具有对应关系;所述N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的补充分量与所述M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的补充分量具有对应关系;所述O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量具有对应关系,所述O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量具有对应关系。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the characteristic principal component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the supplementary component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the P second features.
该技术方案中,压缩反馈的M个信道信息中,每个信道信息对应的特征与N个信道信息对应的特征具有对应关系。In this technical solution, among the M channel information of compressed feedback, the features corresponding to each channel information have a corresponding relationship with the features corresponding to the N channel information.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,确定所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, accuracy levels corresponding to the M channel information are determined.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为网络设备确定的,或者,所述M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为终端设备确定的。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a network device, or the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a terminal device.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为所述网络设备根据所述L个信道信息的优先级信息确定的;或者,所述M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为所述终端设备根据所述L个信道信息的测量结果和/或所述L个信道信息的优先级信息确定的。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation method, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the network device based on the priority information of the L channel information; or, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the terminal device based on the measurement results of the L channel information and/or the priority information of the L channel information.
该技术方案中,根据优先级来确定反馈的信道信息以及精度,保证了多波束上报的高效性和可靠性。In this technical solution, the feedback channel information and accuracy are determined according to the priority, thereby ensuring the efficiency and reliability of multi-beam reporting.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述M个信道信息为所述网络设备确定时,发送所述M个信道信息与所述L个信道信息的对应关系;当所述M个信道信息对应的精度类别为所述网络设备确定时,发送所述M个信道信息分别对应的精度类别。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation method, when the M channel information are determined by the network device, the correspondence between the M channel information and the L channel information is sent; when the precision categories corresponding to the M channel information are determined by the network device, the precision categories corresponding to the M channel information are sent.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,编码器用于终端设备。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the encoder is used in a terminal device.
第二方面,提供了一种用于反馈信道状态的方法,该方法可以由网络设备执行,或者,也可以由配置于网络设备中的解码器执行,本申请对此不作限定。In a second aspect, a method for feeding back channel status is provided. The method may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a decoder configured in the network device, and the present application does not limit this.
该方法包括:接收第二序列,所述第二序列为对应M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量,所述M个信道信息为测量的L个信道信息的部分或全部,L小于或者等于N,N为基于K个天线端口组上的参考信号决 定的信道信息的个数,N为正整数;根据所述第二序列确定第一序列,所述第一序列为对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量;对所述第一序列进行重构,得到所述M个信道信息。The method comprises: receiving a second sequence, wherein the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to M channel information, wherein the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, L is less than or equal to N, and N is a reference signal decision based on K antenna port groups. The method comprises the following steps: determining a first sequence according to the second sequence, wherein the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information; and reconstructing the first sequence to obtain the M channel information.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备可以对终端设备反馈的部分信道信息的联合反馈量进行重构,得到M个信道信息,避免了AI模型的存储/切换开销,降低了实现的复杂度。Based on the above technical solution, the network device can reconstruct the joint feedback amount of part of the channel information fed back by the terminal device to obtain M channel information, thereby avoiding the storage/switching overhead of the AI model and reducing the complexity of the implementation.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述第一序列或第二序列为量化前的序列时,所述联合反馈量为所述第一序列或所述第二序列的长度,或者,当所述第一序列或所述第二序列为量化后的序列时,所述联合反馈量为所述第一序列或所述第二序列的比特数量。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence before quantization, the joint feedback amount is the length of the first sequence or the second sequence, or, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence after quantization, the joint feedback amount is the number of bits of the first sequence or the second sequence.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,确定所述M个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置与所述N个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系;根据所述对应关系确定对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation method, the correspondence between the stacking positions of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking positions of the N channel information at the decoder input end is determined; and X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information are determined according to the correspondence.
该技术方案中,定义了解码器侧输入端的部分反馈量与全反馈量的波束位置对应关系,基于该对应关系可以根据终端设备M个信道信息对应的部分反馈量的矩阵确定出全反馈量的矩阵输入解码器,从而实现部分信道信息的重构。In this technical solution, the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the input end of the decoder side is defined. Based on this correspondence, the matrix input decoder of the full feedback amount can be determined according to the matrix of the partial feedback amount corresponding to the M channel information of the terminal device, thereby realizing the reconstruction of partial channel information.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第二序列包括M个第一特征和P个第二特征,所述M个第一特征与所述M个信道信息对应,所述第一特征指示所述各信道信息的特定特征,所述第二特征指示所述M个信道信息的公共特征,所述根据所述对应关系确定对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量,包括:根据所述对应关系和所述M个第一特征确定N个第一特征,所述N个第一特征与所述N个信道信息对应;根据所述对应关系和所述P个第二特征确定所述N个信道信息对应的O个第二特征,P小于或者等于O;根据所述N个第一特征和所述O个第二特征确定对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the second sequence includes M first features and P second features, the M first features correspond to the M channel information, the first feature indicates a specific feature of each channel information, and the second feature indicates a common feature of the M channel information, and determining X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information according to the corresponding relationship includes: determining N first features according to the corresponding relationship and the M first features, the N first features corresponding to the N channel information; determining O second features corresponding to the N channel information according to the corresponding relationship and the P second features, where P is less than or equal to O; and determining X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information according to the N first features and the O second features.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个第一特征在所述第二序列中的位置与所述N个第一特征在所述第一序列中的位置具有对应关系,所述P个第二特征在所述第二序列中的位置与所述O个第二特征在所述第一序列中的位置具有对应关系。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the positions of the M first features in the second sequence correspond to the positions of the N first features in the first sequence, and the positions of the P second features in the second sequence correspond to the positions of the O second features in the first sequence.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个第一特征和所述P个第二特征包括特征主分量和特征补充分量,所述特征主分量用于完成所述信道信息的重构,所述特征补充分量用于对所述信道信息的精度进行补充。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the M first features and the P second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component, the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information, and the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征中的每一个第一特征包括所述特征主分量,所述N个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征包括所述特征补充分量,所述O个第二特征中的每一个第二特征包括所述特征主分量,所述O个第二特征中的部分或全部第二特征包括所述特征补充分量。In combination with the second aspect, in one possible implementation, each of the N first features includes the feature principal component, some or all of the N first features include the feature supplementary component, each of the O second features includes the feature principal component, and some or all of the O second features include the feature supplementary component.
该技术方案中,压缩反馈的M个信道信息中,不同信道信息采用不同的精度进行反馈,解码器可以根据不同的精度对信道信息进行重构,得到不同精度的信道信息。In this technical solution, among the M channel information that are compressed and fed back, different channel information is fed back with different precisions, and the decoder can reconstruct the channel information according to the different precisions to obtain channel information with different precisions.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的特征主分量与所述M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的特征主分量具有对应关系;所述N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的补充分量与所述M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的补充分量具有对应关系;所述O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量具有对应关系,所述O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量具有对应关系。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the characteristic principal component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the supplementary component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the P second features.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,确定所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the accuracy levels corresponding to the M channel information are determined.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为网络设备确定的,或者,所述M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为终端设备确定的。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a network device, or the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a terminal device.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为所述网络设备根据所述L个信道信息的优先级信息确定的;或者,所述M个模拟波束或所述M个模拟波束对应的精度级别为所述终端设备根据所述L个信道信息的测量结果和/或所述L个信道信息的优先级信息确定的。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation method, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the network device based on the priority information of the L channel information; or, the M simulated beams or the accuracy level corresponding to the M simulated beams is determined by the terminal device based on the measurement results of the L channel information and/or the priority information of the L channel information.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述M个信道信息为终端设备确定时,发送所述M个信道信息与所述L个信道信息的对应关系;当所述M个信道信息对应的精度类别为终端设备确定时,发送所述M个信道信息分别对应的精度类别。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation method, when the M channel information is determined by the terminal device, the correspondence between the M channel information and the L channel information is sent; when the precision categories corresponding to the M channel information are determined by the terminal device, the precision categories corresponding to the M channel information are sent.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,确定所述M个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置与所述N个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系;根据所述对应关系确定所述M个信道 信息。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, determining a corresponding relationship between a stacking position of the M channel information at the decoder input end and a stacking position of the N channel information at the decoder input end; determining the M channel information according to the corresponding relationship; information.
该技术方案中,网络设备可以根据解码器侧输入端的部分反馈量与全反馈量的波束位置对应关系,从输出的全反馈量的矩阵中确定出M个信道信息对应的输出矩阵。In this technical solution, the network device can determine the output matrix corresponding to M channel information from the output matrix of the full feedback amount according to the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the decoder side input end.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,解码器用于网络设备。In conjunction with the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the decoder is used in a network device.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置可以为终端设备,或者,也可以为配置于终端设备中的编码器,本申请对此不作限定。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided. The device may be a terminal device, or may be an encoder configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in the present application.
该装置包括:处理单元,用于对M个信道信息进行压缩,得到第一序列,所述M个信道信息为测量的L个信道信息的部分或全部,L小于或者等于N,N为基于K个天线端口组上的参考信号决定的信道信息的个数,N为正整数,所述第一序列为对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量;处理单元,还用于根据所述第一序列确定第二序列,所述第二序列为对应所述M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量;收发单元,用于向解码器发送所述第二序列。The device includes: a processing unit, used for compressing M channel information to obtain a first sequence, wherein the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, L is less than or equal to N, N is the number of channel information determined based on reference signals on K antenna port groups, N is a positive integer, and the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information; the processing unit is also used for determining a second sequence according to the first sequence, wherein the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information; and a transceiver unit is used for sending the second sequence to a decoder.
其中,N个信道信息对应N个模拟波束,N也可以理解为最大模拟波束的个数。Among them, N channel information corresponds to N simulation beams, and N can also be understood as the maximum number of simulation beams.
该N个模拟波束互不相同,该N个模拟波束的覆盖范围存在重叠区域。The N simulated beams are different from each other, and there is an overlapping area in the coverage range of the N simulated beams.
本申请中,网络设备和终端设备可以预定义或预先确定联合反馈的最大模拟波束个数N与最大反馈开销X。In the present application, the network device and the terminal device may predefine or predetermine the maximum number of simulated beams N and the maximum feedback overhead X for joint feedback.
可以理解的是,终端设备可以对L个信道信息进行测量,并对其中的M个信道信息进行压缩反馈。It can be understood that the terminal device can measure L channel information and compress and feedback M of the channel information.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备可以对最大模拟波束范围内的多个模拟波束进行部分测量及部分压缩反馈,避免了AI模型的存储/切换开销,降低了实现的复杂度。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can perform partial measurement and partial compression feedback on multiple simulated beams within the maximum simulated beam range, avoiding the storage/switching overhead of the AI model and reducing the complexity of implementation.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,当所述第一序列或第二序列为量化前的序列时,所述联合反馈量为所述第一序列或所述第二序列的长度,或者,当所述第一序列或所述第二序列为量化后的序列时,所述联合反馈量为所述第一序列或所述第二序列的比特数量。In combination with the third aspect, in certain implementations of the third aspect, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence before quantization, the joint feedback amount is the length of the first sequence or the second sequence, or, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence after quantization, the joint feedback amount is the number of bits of the first sequence or the second sequence.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元还用于确定所述N个信道信息在所述编码器输入端的堆叠位置与所述M个信道信息在所述编码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系;处理单元还用于根据所述对应关系确定对应所述M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing unit is also used to determine the correspondence between the stacking positions of the N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of the M channel information at the encoder input end; the processing unit is also used to determine Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information based on the correspondence.
该技术方案中,定义了编码器侧输入端的部分反馈量与全反馈量的波束位置对应关系,基于该对应关系可以从编码器输出端输出的全反馈量的矩阵确定出M个信道信息对应的部分反馈量的矩阵,从而实现部分信道信息的压缩和反馈。In this technical solution, the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the encoder input end is defined. Based on this correspondence, the matrix of partial feedback amounts corresponding to M channel information can be determined from the matrix of full feedback amounts output from the encoder output end, thereby realizing compression and feedback of partial channel information.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第一序列包括N个第一特征和O个第二特征,所述N个第一特征与所述N个信道信息对应,所述第一特征指示所述各信道信息的特定特征,所述O个第二特征指示所述N个信道信息的公共特征,所述根据所述对应关系确定对应所述M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量,包括:根据所述对应关系和所述N个第一特征确定M个第一特征,所述M个第一特征与所述M个信道信息对应;根据所述对应关系和所述O个第二特征确定所述M个信道信息对应的P个第二特征,P小于或者等于O;根据所述M个第一特征和所述P个第二特征确定对应所述M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first sequence includes N first features and O second features, the N first features correspond to the N channel information, the first feature indicates a specific feature of each channel information, and the O second features indicate a common feature of the N channel information, and determining Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information according to the corresponding relationship includes: determining M first features according to the corresponding relationship and the N first features, the M first features corresponding to the M channel information; determining P second features corresponding to the M channel information according to the corresponding relationship and the O second features, where P is less than or equal to O; and determining Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information according to the M first features and the P second features.
该技术方案中,将N个信道信息中的公共特征和特有特征分别定义,从而可以实现可拆分的联合反馈,通过部分反馈的方式,支持不同模拟波束数及不同反馈开销下的信道信息的反馈。In this technical solution, the common features and unique features in N channel information are defined separately, so that separable joint feedback can be achieved. Through partial feedback, feedback of channel information under different numbers of simulated beams and different feedback overheads is supported.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征在所述第一序列中的位置与所述M个第一特征在所述第二序列中的位置具有对应关系,所述O个第二特征在所述第一序列中的位置与所述P个第二特征在所述第二序列中的位置具有对应关系。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence, and the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence.
该技术方案中,定义了不同模拟波束特征与全反馈量位置对应关系。In this technical solution, the corresponding relationship between different simulated beam characteristics and the position of the total feedback amount is defined.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征和所述O个第二特征包括特征主分量和特征补充分量,所述特征主分量用于完成所述信道信息的重构,所述特征补充分量用于对所述信道信息的精度进行补充。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the N first features and the O second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component, the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information, and the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information.
该技术方案中,通过特征对应的主分量和补充分量,实现不同精度的反馈,增加了反馈的灵活度。In this technical solution, feedback of different accuracies is achieved through the principal component and supplementary component corresponding to the feature, thereby increasing the flexibility of the feedback.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个第一特征中的每一个第一特征包括所述特征主分量,所述M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征包括所述特征补充分量,所述P个第二特征中的每一个第二特征包括所述特征主分量,所述P个第二特征中的部分或全部第二特征包括所述特征补充分量。In combination with the third aspect, in one possible implementation, each of the M first features includes the feature principal component, some or all of the M first features include the feature supplementary component, each of the P second features includes the feature principal component, and some or all of the P second features include the feature supplementary component.
该技术方案中,压缩反馈的M个信道信息中,不同信道信息可以采用不同的精度进行反馈,实现了 灵活反馈。In this technical solution, among the M channel information compressed and fed back, different channel information can be fed back with different precisions, thus achieving Flexible feedback.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的特征主分量与所述M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的特征主分量具有对应关系;所述N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的补充分量与所述M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的补充分量具有对应关系;所述O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量具有对应关系,所述O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量具有对应关系。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the characteristic principal component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the supplementary component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the P second features.
该技术方案中,压缩反馈的M个信道信息中,每个信道信息对应的特征与N个信道信息对应的特征具有对应关系。In this technical solution, among the M channel information of compressed feedback, the features corresponding to each channel information have a corresponding relationship with the features corresponding to the N channel information.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元还用于确定所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further used to determine the accuracy levels corresponding to the M channel information.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为网络设备确定的,或者,所述M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为终端设备确定的。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a network device, or the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a terminal device.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为所述网络设备根据所述L个信道信息的优先级信息确定的;或者,所述M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为所述终端设备根据所述L个信道信息的测量结果和/或所述L个信道信息的优先级信息确定的。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation method, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the network device based on the priority information of the L channel information; or, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the terminal device based on the measurement results of the L channel information and/or the priority information of the L channel information.
该技术方案中,根据优先级来确定反馈的信道信息以及精度,保证了多波束上报的高效性和可靠性。In this technical solution, the feedback channel information and accuracy are determined according to the priority, thereby ensuring the efficiency and reliability of multi-beam reporting.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述M个信道信息为所述网络设备确定时,收发单元还用于发送所述M个信道信息与所述L个信道信息的对应关系;当所述M个信道信息对应的精度类别为所述网络设备确定时,收发单元还用于发送所述M个信道信息分别对应的精度类别。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation method, when the M channel information is determined by the network device, the transceiver unit is also used to send the correspondence between the M channel information and the L channel information; when the accuracy category corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the network device, the transceiver unit is also used to send the accuracy categories corresponding to the M channel information respectively.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,编码器用于终端设备。In conjunction with the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the encoder is used in a terminal device.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置可以为网络设备,或者,也可以为配置于网络设备中的解码器,本申请对此不作限定。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided. The device may be a network device, or may be a decoder configured in a network device, which is not limited in the present application.
该方法包括:收发单元,用于接收第二序列,所述第二序列为对应M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量,所述M个信道信息为测量的L个信道信息的部分或全部,L小于或者等于N,N为基于K个天线端口组上的参考信号决定的信道信息的个数,N为正整数;处理单元,用于根据所述第二序列确定第一序列,所述第一序列为对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量;处理单元还用于对所述第一序列进行重构,得到所述M个信道信息。The method includes: a transceiver unit, used to receive a second sequence, where the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to M channel information, where the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, where L is less than or equal to N, where N is the number of channel information determined based on reference signals on K antenna port groups, and N is a positive integer; a processing unit, used to determine a first sequence according to the second sequence, where the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information; and the processing unit is further used to reconstruct the first sequence to obtain the M channel information.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备可以对终端设备反馈的部分信道信息的联合反馈量进行重构,得到M个信道信息,避免了AI模型的存储/切换开销,降低了实现的复杂度。Based on the above technical solution, the network device can reconstruct the joint feedback amount of part of the channel information fed back by the terminal device to obtain M channel information, thereby avoiding the storage/switching overhead of the AI model and reducing the complexity of the implementation.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述第一序列或第二序列为量化前的序列时,所述联合反馈量为所述第一序列或所述第二序列的长度,或者,当所述第一序列或所述第二序列为量化后的序列时,所述联合反馈量为所述第一序列或所述第二序列的比特数量。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence before quantization, the joint feedback amount is the length of the first sequence or the second sequence, or, when the first sequence or the second sequence is a sequence after quantization, the joint feedback amount is the number of bits of the first sequence or the second sequence.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元还用于确定所述M个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置与所述N个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系;处理单元还用于根据所述对应关系确定对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing unit is also used to determine the correspondence between the stacking position of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking position of the N channel information at the decoder input end; the processing unit is also used to determine X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information based on the corresponding relationship.
该技术方案中,定义了解码器侧输入端的部分反馈量与全反馈量的波束位置对应关系,基于该对应关系可以根据终端设备M个信道信息对应的部分反馈量的矩阵确定出全反馈量的矩阵输入解码器,从而实现部分信道信息的重构。In this technical solution, the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the input end of the decoder side is defined. Based on this correspondence, the matrix input decoder of the full feedback amount can be determined according to the matrix of the partial feedback amount corresponding to the M channel information of the terminal device, thereby realizing the reconstruction of partial channel information.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第二序列包括M个第一特征和P个第二特征,所述M个第一特征与所述M个信道信息对应,所述第一特征指示所述各信道信息的特定特征,所述第二特征指示所述M个信道信息的公共特征,所述根据所述对应关系确定对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量,包括:根据所述对应关系和所述M个第一特征确定N个第一特征,所述N个第一特征与所述N个信道信息对应;根据所述对应关系和所述P个第二特征确定所述N个信道信息对应的O个第二特征,P小于或者等于O;根据所述N个第一特征和所述O个第二特征确定对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the second sequence includes M first features and P second features, the M first features correspond to the M channel information, the first feature indicates a specific feature of each channel information, and the second feature indicates a common feature of the M channel information, and determining X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information according to the corresponding relationship includes: determining N first features according to the corresponding relationship and the M first features, the N first features corresponding to the N channel information; determining O second features corresponding to the N channel information according to the corresponding relationship and the P second features, where P is less than or equal to O; and determining X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information according to the N first features and the O second features.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个第一特征在所述第二序列中的位置与所述N个第一特征在所述第一序列中的位置具有对应关系,所述P个第二特征在所述第二序列中的位置与所述O个第二特征在所述第一序列中的位置具有对应关系。 In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the positions of the M first features in the second sequence correspond to the positions of the N first features in the first sequence, and the positions of the P second features in the second sequence correspond to the positions of the O second features in the first sequence.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个第一特征和所述P个第二特征包括特征主分量和特征补充分量,所述特征主分量用于完成所述信道信息的重构,所述特征补充分量用于对所述信道信息的精度进行补充。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the M first features and the P second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component, the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information, and the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征中的每一个第一特征包括所述特征主分量,所述N个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征包括所述特征补充分量,所述O个第二特征中的每一个第二特征包括所述特征主分量,所述O个第二特征中的部分或全部第二特征包括所述特征补充分量。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, each of the N first features includes the feature principal component, some or all of the N first features include the feature supplementary component, each of the O second features includes the feature principal component, and some or all of the O second features include the feature supplementary component.
该技术方案中,压缩反馈的M个信道信息中,不同信道信息采用不同的精度进行反馈,解码器可以根据不同的精度对信道信息进行重构,得到不同精度的信道信息。In this technical solution, among the M channel information that are compressed and fed back, different channel information is fed back with different precisions, and the decoder can reconstruct the channel information according to the different precisions to obtain channel information with different precisions.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的特征主分量与所述M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的特征主分量具有对应关系;所述N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的补充分量与所述M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的补充分量具有对应关系;所述O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量具有对应关系,所述O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量具有对应关系。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the characteristic principal component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the supplementary component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the P second features.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元还用于确定所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further used to determine the accuracy levels corresponding to the M channel information.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为网络设备确定的,或者,所述M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为终端设备确定的。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a network device, or the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by a terminal device.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,M个信道信息或所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别为所述网络设备根据所述L个信道信息的优先级信息确定的;或者,所述M个模拟波束或所述M个模拟波束对应的精度级别为所述终端设备根据所述L个信道信息的测量结果和/或所述L个信道信息的优先级信息确定的。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the M channel information or the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the network device based on the priority information of the L channel information; or, the M simulated beams or the accuracy level corresponding to the M simulated beams is determined by the terminal device based on the measurement results of the L channel information and/or the priority information of the L channel information.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述M个信道信息为终端设备确定时,收发单元还用于发送所述M个信道信息与所述L个信道信息的对应关系;当所述M个信道信息对应的精度类别为终端设备确定时,收发单元还用于发送所述M个信道信息分别对应的精度类别。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation method, when the M channel information is determined by the terminal device, the transceiver unit is also used to send the correspondence between the M channel information and the L channel information; when the accuracy category corresponding to the M channel information is determined by the terminal device, the transceiver unit is also used to send the accuracy categories corresponding to the M channel information respectively.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元还用于确定所述M个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置与所述N个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系;处理单元还用于根据所述对应关系确定所述M个信道信息。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing unit is also used to determine the correspondence between the stacking positions of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking positions of the N channel information at the decoder input end; the processing unit is also used to determine the M channel information based on the correspondence.
该技术方案中,网络设备可以根据解码器侧输入端的部分反馈量与全反馈量的波束位置对应关系,从输出的全反馈量的矩阵中确定出M个信道信息对应的输出矩阵。In this technical solution, the network device can determine the output matrix corresponding to M channel information from the output matrix of the full feedback amount according to the beam position correspondence between the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount at the decoder side input end.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,解码器用于网络设备。In conjunction with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the decoder is used in a network device.
第五方面,提供一种通信装置,该装置用于执行上述第一方面或第二方面提供的方法。具体地,该通信装置可以包括用于执行第一方面或第二方面的上述任意一种实现方式提供的方法的单元和/或模块,如处理单元和/或通信单元。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, which is used to execute the method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect. Specifically, the communication device may include a unit and/or module, such as a processing unit and/or a communication unit, for executing the method provided in any one of the above implementations of the first aspect or the second aspect.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置包括通信单元和处理单元,通信单元可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口;处理单元可以是至少一个处理器。可选地,收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。In one implementation, the communication device includes a communication unit and a processing unit, the communication unit may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface; the processing unit may be at least one processor. Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为网络设备中的芯片、芯片系统或电路。当该NTN定位装置为网络设备中的芯片、芯片系统或电路时,通信单元可以是该芯片、芯片系统或电路上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等;处理单元可以是至少一个处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路等。In another implementation, the communication device is a chip, a chip system or a circuit in a network device. When the NTN positioning device is a chip, a chip system or a circuit in a network device, the communication unit may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip, the chip system or the circuit; the processing unit may be at least one processor, a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置设备,包括,处理器,可选地,还包括存储器,该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得该发送设备执行上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising a processor and, optionally, a memory, wherein the processor is used to control a transceiver to send and receive signals, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the sending device executes a method in any possible implementation of the first aspect or the second aspect mentioned above.
可选地,该处理器为一个或多个,该存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, the processor is one or more and the memory is one or more.
可选地,该存储器可以与该处理器集成在一起,或者该存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be provided separately from the processor.
可选地,该第一设备还包括收发器,收发器具体可以为发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。Optionally, the first device further includes a transceiver, which may specifically be a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
第七方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序或代码,该计算机程序或代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方 式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program or code, and when the computer program or code is executed on a computer, the computer executes any possible implementation method of the first aspect or the second aspect. The method in the formula.
第八方面,提供了一种芯片,包括至少一个处理器,该至少一个处理器与存储器耦合,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得安装有该芯片系统的发送设备执行上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In an eighth aspect, a chip is provided, comprising at least one processor, wherein the at least one processor is coupled to a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that a sending device equipped with the chip system executes a method in any possible implementation of the first aspect or the second aspect mentioned above.
其中,该芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的输入电路或者接口,以及用于接收信息或数据的输出电路或者接口。The chip may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
第九方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码被发送设备运行时,执行上述第一方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product is provided, which includes: a computer program code, which, when the computer program code is executed by a sending device, executes a method in any possible implementation of the first aspect or the second aspect.
第三方面至第九方面的有益效果可参考第一至第二方面的有益效果,不再赘述。The beneficial effects of the third to ninth aspects can refer to the beneficial effects of the first to second aspects and will not be elaborated on again.
图1是适用于本申请实施例的一种通信系统的示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图2是适用于本申请实施例的另一种通信系统的示意图。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图3是适用于本申请实施例的一种可能的应用框架示意图。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a possible application framework applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图4是适用于本申请实施例的一种可能的应用框架示意图。FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a possible application framework applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图5是适用于本申请实施例的一种CSI压缩反馈示意图。FIG5 is a schematic diagram of CSI compression feedback applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图6是适用于本申请实施例的一种硬件架构600的示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture 600 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图7是适用于本申请实施例的一种用于反馈信道信息的方法700的示意性流程图。FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a method 700 for feeding back channel information applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图8是适用于本申请实施例的一种AI模型设计示意图。FIG8 is a schematic diagram of an AI model design applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图9是适用于本申请实施例的N个模拟波束信道信息在输入输出端的堆叠方式的示意图。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a stacking method of N simulated beam channel information at input and output ends applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图10是适用于本申请实施例的一种可拆分联合反馈示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a detachable joint feedback applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图11是适用于本申请实施例的一种用于反馈信道信息的方法1100的示意性流程图。FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a method 1100 for feeding back channel information applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图12是适用于本申请实施例的一种压缩反馈流程的示意图。FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a compression feedback process applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图13是适用于本申请实施例的一种通信装置的结构框图。FIG13 is a structural block diagram of a communication device applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图14是适用于本申请实施例的一种通信装置的结构框图。FIG. 14 is a structural block diagram of a communication device applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请提供的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:第五代(5th generation,5G)或新无线(new radio,NR)系统、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)系统等。本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于未来的通信系统,如第六代移动通信系统。本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于设备到设备(device to device,D2D)通信,车到万物(vehicle-to-everything,V2X)通信,机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)通信,机器类型通信(machine type communication,MTC),以及物联网(internet of things,IoT)通信系统或者其他通信系统。The technical solution provided in this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) or new radio (new radio, NR) system, long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (frequency division duplex, FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD) system, etc. The technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation mobile communication system. The technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to device to device (D2D) communication, vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine to machine (M2M) communication, machine type communication (machine type communication, MTC), and Internet of things (IoT) communication system or other communication systems.
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The following will be combined with the drawings in the embodiments of the present application to clearly and completely describe the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments are part of the embodiments of the present application, not all of the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in the present application, all other embodiments obtained by ordinary technicians in this field without creative work are within the scope of protection of this application.
首先简单介绍适用于本申请的通信系统,如下。First, a communication system applicable to the present application is briefly introduced as follows.
图1是适用于本申请实施例的通信方法的一种通信系统的示意图。如图1所示,通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备,例如图1所示的网络设备110;通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备,例如图1所示的终端设备120和终端设备130。网络设备110与终端设备(如终端设备120和终端设备130)可通过无线链路通信。该通信系统中的各通信设备之间,例如,网络设备110与终端设备120之间,可通过多天线技术通信。FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to a communication method of an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG1 , the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG1 ; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 and the terminal device 130 shown in FIG1 . The network device 110 and the terminal device (such as the terminal device 120 and the terminal device 130) may communicate via a wireless link. The communication devices in the communication system, for example, the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, may communicate via a multi-antenna technology.
应理解,图1仅为便于理解而示例的简化示意图,该通信系统中还可以包括其他网络设备或者还可以包括其他终端设备,图1中未予以画出。It should be understood that FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram for ease of understanding, and the communication system may also include other network devices or other terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1 .
还应理解,图1所示的通信系统100仅为本申请实施例的应用场景的一种示例,本申请还可以适用于任意两个设备之间的通信,例如,适用于终端设备与终端设备的通信,也可以适用于网络设备与网络设 备之间的通信。It should also be understood that the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1 is only an example of an application scenario of the embodiment of the present application, and the present application can also be applied to communication between any two devices, for example, communication between terminal devices and terminal devices, and communication between network devices and network devices. Communication between devices.
图2是适用于本申请实施例的另一种通信系统的示意图。相较于图1所示的通信系统100而言,图2所示的通信系统200还包括AI网元140。AI网元140用于执行AI相关的操作,例如,构建训练数据集或训练AI模型等。FIG2 is a schematic diagram of another communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application. Compared with the communication system 100 shown in FIG1 , the communication system 200 shown in FIG2 further includes an AI network element 140. The AI network element 140 is used to perform AI-related operations, such as building a training data set or training an AI model.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备110可以将与AI模型的训练相关的数据发送给AI网元140,由AI网元140构建训练数据集,并训练AI模型。例如,与AI模型的训练相关的数据可以包括终端设备上报的数据。AI网元140可以将AI模型相关的操作的结果发送至网络设备110,并通过网络设备110转发至终端设备。例如,AI模型相关的操作的结果可以包括以下至少一项:已完成训练的AI模型、模型的评估结果或测试结果等。示例性地,已完成训练的AI模型的一部分可以部署于网络设备110上,另一部分部署于终端设备上。可替换地,已完成训练的AI模型可以部署于网络设备110上。或者,已完成训练的AI模型可以部署于终端设备上。In one possible implementation, the network device 110 may send data related to the training of the AI model to the AI network element 140, which constructs a training data set and trains the AI model. For example, the data related to the training of the AI model may include data reported by the terminal device. The AI network element 140 may send the results of the operations related to the AI model to the network device 110, and forward them to the terminal device through the network device 110. For example, the results of the operations related to the AI model may include at least one of the following: an AI model that has completed training, an evaluation result or a test result of the model, etc. Exemplarily, a part of the trained AI model may be deployed on the network device 110, and another part may be deployed on the terminal device. Alternatively, the trained AI model may be deployed on the network device 110. Alternatively, the trained AI model may be deployed on the terminal device.
应理解,图2仅以AI网元140与网络设备110直接相连为例进行说明,在其他场景中,AI网元140也可以与终端设备相连。或者,AI网元140可以同时与网络设备110和终端设备相连。或者,AI网元140还可以通过第三方网元与网络设备110相连。本申请实施例对AI网元与其他网元的连接关系不做限定。It should be understood that FIG. 2 only illustrates the example of the AI network element 140 being directly connected to the network device 110. In other scenarios, the AI network element 140 may also be connected to the terminal device. Alternatively, the AI network element 140 may be connected to the network device 110 and the terminal device at the same time. Alternatively, the AI network element 140 may also be connected to the network device 110 through a third-party network element. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the connection relationship between the AI network element and other network elements.
AI网元140也可以作为一个模块设置于网络设备和/或终端设备中,例如,设置于图1所示的网络设备110或终端设备中。The AI network element 140 may also be provided as a module in a network device and/or a terminal device, for example, in the network device 110 or the terminal device shown in FIG. 1 .
需要说明的是,图1和图2仅为便于理解而示例的简化示意图,例如,通信系统中还可以包括其它设备,如还可以包括无线中继设备和/或无线回传设备等,图1和图2中未予以画出。在实际应用中,该通信系统可以包括多个网络设备,也可以包括多个终端设备。本申请实施例对通信系统中包括的网络设备和终端设备的数量不做限定。It should be noted that FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are simplified schematic diagrams for ease of understanding. For example, the communication system may also include other devices, such as wireless relay devices and/or wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2. In practical applications, the communication system may include multiple network devices and may also include multiple terminal devices. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of network devices and terminal devices included in the communication system.
本申请实施例中,网络设备是终端设备通过无线方式接入到移动通信系统中的接入设备,例如包括接入网(access network,AN)设备,例如基站。网络设备也可以是指在空口与终端设备通信的设备。网络设备可以包括LTE系统或高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced,LTE-A)中的演进型基站(evolved Node B)(也简称为eNB或e-NodeB);网络设备也可以包括5G NR系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNB);或者,网络设备也可以包括无线保真(wireless-fidelity,Wi-Fi)系统中的接入节点等;或者网络设备可以为中继站、车载设备以及未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)设备、D2D网络中的设备、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)网络中的设备、物联网(internet of things,IoT)网络中的设备或者PLMN网络中的网络设备等。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device is an access device for the terminal device to access the mobile communication system by wireless means, for example, including an access network (AN) device, such as a base station. The network device may also refer to a device that communicates with the terminal device at the air interface. The network device may include an evolved Node B (also referred to as eNB or e-NodeB) in an LTE system or an advanced long term evolution (LTE-A); the network device may also include a next generation node B (gNB) in a 5G NR system; or, the network device may also include an access node in a wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) system, etc.; or the network device may be a relay station, an on-board device, and a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN) device, a device in a D2D network, a device in a machine to machine (M2M) network, a device in an Internet of Things (IoT) network, or a network device in a PLMN network, etc. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device.
另外,本申请实施例中的基站可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制。CU和DU可以根据其具备的无线网络的协议层功能进行划分,例如分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU,PDCP以下的协议层,例如无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层和介质访问控制(medium access control,MAC)层等的功能设置在DU。需要说明的是,这种协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例,还可以在其它协议层划分。射频装置可以拉远,不放在DU中,也可以集成在DU中,或者部分拉远部分集成在DU中,本申请实施例不作任何限制。另外,在一些实施例中,还可以将CU的控制面(control plan,CP)和用户面(user plan,UP)分离,分成不同实体来实现,分别为控制面CU实体(CU-CP实体)和用户面CU实体(CU-UP实体)。在该网络架构中,CU产生的信令可以通过DU发送给终端设备,或者UE产生的信令可以通过DU发送给CU。DU可以不对该信令进行解析而直接通过协议层封装而透传给UE或CU。在该网络架构中,将CU划分为无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)侧的网络设备,此外,也可以将CU划分作为核心网(core network,CN)侧的网络设备,本申请对此不做限制。In addition, the base station in the embodiment of the present application may include a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU), and multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU. CU and DU may be divided according to the protocol layer functions of the wireless network they possess, for example, the functions of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer and the protocol layers above are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the PDCP, such as the radio link control (RLC) layer and the medium access control (MAC) layer, are set in the DU. It should be noted that this division of the protocol layer is only an example, and it can also be divided in other protocol layers. The radio frequency device can be remote and not placed in the DU, or it can be integrated in the DU, or part of it can be remote and part of it can be integrated in the DU, and the embodiment of the present application does not impose any restrictions. In addition, in some embodiments, the control plane (CP) and the user plane (UP) of the CU can also be separated and divided into different entities for implementation, namely the control plane CU entity (CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity (CU-UP entity). In this network architecture, the signaling generated by the CU can be sent to the terminal device through the DU, or the signaling generated by the UE can be sent to the CU through the DU. The DU can directly encapsulate the signaling through the protocol layer and transparently transmit it to the UE or CU without parsing it. In this network architecture, the CU is divided into a network device on the radio access network (RAN) side. In addition, the CU can also be divided as a network device on the core network (CN) side, and this application does not limit this.
所述接入网设备还可以是服务器等。例如,车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)技术中的网络设备可以为路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)。以下对接入网设备以为基站为例进行说明。基站可以与终端设备进行通信,也可以通过中继站与终端设备进行通信。终端设备可以与不同接入技术中的多个基站进行通信。The access network device may also be a server, etc. For example, the network device in the vehicle to everything (V2X) technology may be a road side unit (RSU). The following describes the access network device by taking a base station as an example. The base station may communicate with the terminal device, or may communicate with the terminal device through a relay station. The terminal device may communicate with multiple base stations in different access technologies.
本申请实施例中,核心网设备用于实现移动管理,数据处理,会话管理,策略和计费等功能。不同接入技术的系统中实现核心网功能的设备名称可以不同,本申请实施例并不对此进行限定。以5G系统为例,所述核心网设备包括:接入和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)、会话 管理功能(session management function,SMF)、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)或用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)等。In the embodiment of the present application, the core network equipment is used to implement functions such as mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and billing. The names of the devices that implement the core network functions in systems with different access technologies may be different, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit this. Taking the 5G system as an example, the core network equipment includes: access and mobility management function (AMF), session management, policy and billing. Management function (session management function, SMF), policy control function (policy control function, PCF) or user plane function (user plane function, UPF), etc.
本申请实施例中,终端设备是一种具有无线收发功能的设备,可以向网络设备发送信号,或接收来自网络设备的信号。终端设备可包括用户设备(user equipment,UE),有时也称为终端、接入站、UE站、远方站、无线通信设备、或用户装置等等。所述终端设备用于连接人,物,机器等,可广泛用于各种场景,例如包括但不限于以下场景:蜂窝通信、D2D、V2X、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IoT)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)、工业控制(industrial control)、无人驾驶(self driving)、远程医疗(remote medical)、智能电网(smart grid)、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市(smart city)、无人机、机器人等场景的终端设备。例如,所述终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、VR终端、AR终端、工业控制中的无线终端、无人驾驶中的无线终端、IoT网络中智能音箱、远程医疗中的无线终端设备、智能电网中的无线终端设备、运输安全中的无线终端设备、智慧城市中的无线终端设备,或智慧家庭中的无线终端设备等等。作为示例而非限定,在本申请的实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备或智能穿戴式设备等,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。而如上介绍的各种终端设备,如果位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内),都可以认为是车载终端设备,车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit,OBU)。本申请的终端设备还可以是作为一个或多个部件或者单元而内置于车辆的车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元,车辆通过内置的所述车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元可以实施本申请的方法。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device is a device with wireless transceiver function, which can send signals to the network device or receive signals from the network device. The terminal device may include user equipment (UE), sometimes also referred to as terminal, access station, UE station, remote station, wireless communication equipment, or user device, etc. The terminal device is used to connect people, objects, machines, etc., and can be widely used in various scenarios, such as but not limited to the following scenarios: cellular communication, D2D, V2X, machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC), Internet of Things (IoT), virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR), industrial control, self-driving, remote medical, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, drone, robot and other scenarios of terminal devices. For example, the terminal device may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a VR terminal, an AR terminal, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in unmanned driving, a smart speaker in an IoT network, a wireless terminal device in telemedicine, a wireless terminal device in a smart grid, a wireless terminal device in transportation safety, a wireless terminal device in a smart city, or a wireless terminal device in a smart home, etc. As an example and not a limitation, in an embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices may also be referred to as wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc., which are a general term for wearable devices that are intelligently designed and developed using wearable technology for daily wear, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes. The various terminal devices introduced above, if located on a vehicle (for example, placed in a vehicle or installed in a vehicle), can be considered as vehicle-mounted terminal devices, and vehicle-mounted terminal devices are also referred to as on-board units (OBUs). The terminal device of the present application may also be a vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted component, vehicle-mounted chip or vehicle-mounted unit that is built into the vehicle as one or more components or units. The vehicle can implement the method of the present application through the built-in vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted component, vehicle-mounted chip or vehicle-mounted unit.
本申请实施例中,用于实现网络设备功能的通信装置可以是网络设备,也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统,该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In the embodiment of the present application, the communication device for realizing the function of the network device may be a network device, or may be a device capable of supporting the network device to realize the function, such as a chip system, which may be installed in the network device. In the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application, the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the device for realizing the function of the network device as an example that the network device is used as the device.
本申请实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于第四代移动通信技术(the 4th generation,4G)系统,5G系统,NTN系统,车到万物(vehicle to everything,V2X),长期演进-车联网(LTE-vehicle,LTE-V),车到车(vehicle to vehicle,V2V),车联网,机器类通信(Machine Type Communications,MTC),物联网(internet of things,IoT),长期演进-机器到机器(LTE-machine to machine,LTE-M),机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M),物联网,或者将来的移动通信系统。The technical solution provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to the fourth generation mobile communication technology (the 4th generation, 4G) system, 5G system, NTN system, vehicle to everything (vehicle to everything, V2X), long-term evolution-vehicle network (LTE-vehicle, LTE-V), vehicle to vehicle (vehicle to vehicle, V2V), vehicle network, machine type communications (Machine Type Communications, MTC), Internet of things (internet of things, IoT), long-term evolution-machine to machine (LTE-machine to machine, LTE-M), machine to machine (machine to machine, M2M), Internet of Things, or future mobile communication systems.
网络设备和终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上;还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和卫星上。本申请实施例中对网络设备和终端设备所处的场景不做限定。此外,终端设备和网络设备可以是硬件设备,也可以是在专用硬件上运行的软件功能,通用硬件上运行的软件功能,比如,是平台(例如,云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能,又或者,是包括专用或通用硬件设备和软件功能的实体,本申请对于终端设备和网络设备的具体形态不作限定。Network devices and terminal devices can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on the water; they can also be deployed on aircraft, balloons and satellites in the air. The scenarios in which network devices and terminal devices are located are not limited in the embodiments of the present application. In addition, terminal devices and network devices can be hardware devices, or they can be software functions running on dedicated hardware, software functions running on general-purpose hardware, such as virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud platform), or entities including dedicated or general-purpose hardware devices and software functions. The present application does not limit the specific forms of terminal devices and network devices.
此外,为了在无线网络中支持AI技术,网络中还可能引入AI节点。In addition, in order to support AI technology in wireless networks, AI nodes may also be introduced into the network.
可选地,AI节点可以部署于该通信系统中的如下位置中的一项或多项:接入网络设备、终端设备、或核心网设备等,或者,AI节点也可单独部署,例如,部署于上述任一项设备之外的位置,比如,过顶(over the top,OTT)系统的主机或云端服务器中。AI节点可以与通信系统中的其它设备通信,其它设备例如可以为以下中的一项或多项:网络设备,终端设备,或,核心网的网元等。Optionally, the AI node can be deployed in one or more of the following locations in the communication system: access network equipment, terminal equipment, or core network equipment, etc., or the AI node can also be deployed separately, for example, deployed in a location other than any of the above devices, such as a host or cloud server in an over-the-top (OTT) system. The AI node can communicate with other devices in the communication system, and the other devices can be, for example, one or more of the following: network equipment, terminal equipment, or network elements of the core network, etc.
可以理解,本申请对于AI节点的数量不予限制。例如,当有多个AI节点时,多个AI节点可以基于功能进行划分,如不同的AI节点负责不同的功能。It is understood that the present application does not limit the number of AI nodes. For example, when there are multiple AI nodes, the multiple AI nodes can be divided based on functions, such as different AI nodes are responsible for different functions.
还可以理解,AI节点可以是各自独立的设备,也可以集成于同一设备中实现不同的功能,或者可以是硬件设备中的网络元件,也可以是在专用硬件上运行的软件功能,或者是平台(例如,云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能,本申请对于上述AI节点的具体形态不作限定。It can also be understood that AI nodes can be independent devices, or they can be integrated into the same device to implement different functions, or they can be network elements in hardware devices, or they can be software functions running on dedicated hardware, or they can be virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (for example, a cloud platform). This application does not limit the specific form of the above-mentioned AI nodes.
AI节点可以为AI网元或AI模块。An AI node can be an AI network element or an AI module.
图3为通信系统中的一种可能的应用框架示意图。如图3所示,通信系统中网元之间通过接口(例如NG,Xn),或空口相连。这些网元节点,例如核心网设备、接入网节点(RAN节点)、终端或OAM中的一个或多个设备中设置有一个或多个AI模块(为清楚起见,图3中仅示出1个)。所述接入网节点可以作为单独的RAN节点,也可以包括多个RAN节点,例如,包括CU和DU。所述CU和、或DU也可 以设置一个或多个AI模块。可选的,CU还可以被拆分为CU-CP和CU-UP。CU-CP和/或CU-UP中设置有一个或多个AI模型。FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a possible application framework in a communication system. As shown in FIG3 , network elements in the communication system are connected via interfaces (e.g., NG, Xn) or air interfaces. One or more AI modules are provided in one or more of these network element nodes, such as core network equipment, access network nodes (RAN nodes), terminals, or OAM devices (for clarity, only one is shown in FIG3 ). The access network node may be a separate RAN node, or may include multiple RAN nodes, for example, including a CU and a DU. The CU and/or DU may also be One or more AI modules can be set. Optionally, the CU can also be split into CU-CP and CU-UP. One or more AI models are set in the CU-CP and/or CU-UP.
所述AI模块用以实现相应的AI功能。不同网元中部署的AI模块可以相同或不同。AI模块的模型根据不同的参数配置,AI模块可以实现不同的功能。AI模块的模型可以是基于以下一项或多项参数配置的:结构参数(例如神经网络层数、神经网络宽度、层间的连接关系、神经元的权值、神经元的激活函数、或激活函数中的偏置中的至少一项)、输入参数(例如输入参数的类型和/或输入参数的维度)、或输出参数(例如输出参数的类型和/或输出参数的维度)。其中,激活函数中的偏置还可以称为神经网络的偏置。The AI module is used to implement the corresponding AI function. The AI modules deployed in different network elements may be the same or different. The model of the AI module can implement different functions according to different parameter configurations. The model of the AI module can be configured based on one or more of the following parameters: structural parameters (such as the number of neural network layers, the width of the neural network, the connection relationship between layers, the weight of the neuron, the activation function of the neuron, or at least one of the biases in the activation function), input parameters (such as the type of input parameters and/or the dimension of input parameters), or output parameters (such as the type of output parameters and/or the dimension of output parameters). Among them, the bias in the activation function can also be called the bias of the neural network.
一个AI模块可以具有一个或多个模型。一个模型可以推理得到一个输出,该输出包括一个参数或者多个参数。不同模型的学习过程、训练过程、或推理过程可以部署在不同的节点或设备中,或者可以部署在相同的节点或设备中。An AI module can have one or more models. A model can be inferred to obtain an output, which includes one parameter or multiple parameters. The learning process, training process, or inference process of different models can be deployed in different nodes or devices, or can be deployed in the same node or device.
图4为通信系统中的一种可能的应用框架示意图。如图4所示,通信系统中包括RAN智能控制器(RAN intelligent controller,RIC)。例如,所述RIC可以是图3中示出的AI模块,用于实现AI相关的功能。所述RIC包括近实时RIC(near-real time RIC,near-RT RIC),和非实时RIC(non-real time RIC,Non-RT RIC)。其中,非实时RIC主要处理非实时的信息,比如,对时延不敏感的数据,该数据的时延可以为秒级。实时RIC主要处理近实时的信息,比如,对时延相对敏感的数据,该数据的时延为数十毫秒级。FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a possible application framework in a communication system. As shown in FIG4 , the communication system includes a RAN intelligent controller (RIC). For example, the RIC may be the AI module shown in FIG3 , which is used to implement AI-related functions. The RIC includes a near-real-time RIC (near-real-time RIC, near-RT RIC) and a non-real-time RIC (non-real-time RIC, Non-RT RIC). Among them, the non-real-time RIC mainly processes non-real-time information, such as data that is not sensitive to delay, and the delay of the data may be in the order of seconds. The real-time RIC mainly processes near-real-time information, such as data that is relatively sensitive to delay, and the delay of the data is in the order of tens of milliseconds.
所述近实时RIC用于进行模型训练和推理。例如,用于训练AI模型,利用该AI模型进行推理。近实时RIC可以从RAN节点(例如CU、CU-CP、CU-UP、DU和/或RU)和/或终端获得网络侧和/或终端侧的信息。该信息可以作为训练数据或者推理数据。可选的,近实时RIC可以将推理结果递交给RAN节点和/或终端。可选的,CU和DU之间,和/或DU和RU之间可以交互推理结果。例如近实时RIC将推理结果递交给DU,DU将其发给RU。The near real-time RIC is used for model training and reasoning. For example, it is used to train an AI model and use the AI model for reasoning. The near real-time RIC can obtain information on the network side and/or the terminal side from a RAN node (e.g., CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and/or RU) and/or a terminal. This information can be used as training data or reasoning data. Optionally, the near real-time RIC can submit the reasoning results to the RAN node and/or the terminal. Optionally, the reasoning results can be exchanged between the CU and the DU, and/or between the DU and the RU. For example, the near real-time RIC submits the reasoning results to the DU, and the DU sends it to the RU.
所述非实时RIC也用于进行模型训练和推理。例如,用于训练AI模型,利用该模型进行推理。非实时RIC可以从RAN节点(例如CU、CU-CP、CU-UP、DU和/或RU)和/或终端获得网络侧和/或终端侧的信息。该信息可以作为训练数据或者推理数据,推理结果可以被递交给RAN节点和/或终端。可选的,CU和DU之间,和/或DU和RU之间可以交互推理结果,例如非实时RIC将推理结果递交给DU,由DU将其发给RU。The non-real-time RIC is also used for model training and reasoning. For example, it is used to train an AI model and use the model for reasoning. The non-real-time RIC can obtain information on the network side and/or the terminal side from a RAN node (such as a CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU and/or RU) and/or a terminal. The information can be used as training data or reasoning data, and the reasoning results can be submitted to the RAN node and/or the terminal. Optionally, the reasoning results can be exchanged between the CU and the DU, and/or between the DU and the RU. For example, the non-real-time RIC submits the reasoning results to the DU, and the DU sends it to the RU.
所述近实时RIC,非实时RIC也可以分别作为一个网元单独设置。可选的,所述近实时RIC,非实时RIC也可以作为其他设备的一部分,例如,近实时RIC设置在RAN节点中(例如,CU,DU中),而非实时RIC设置在OAM中、云服务器中、核心网设备、或者其他网络设备中。The near real-time RIC and the non-real-time RIC may also be separately set as a network element. Optionally, the near real-time RIC and the non-real-time RIC may also be part of other devices, for example, the near real-time RIC is set in a RAN node (for example, in a CU or DU), and the non-real-time RIC is set in an OAM, a cloud server, a core network device, or other network devices.
为了便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案,以下对本申请实施例中的术语进行说明。In order to facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the terms in the embodiments of the present application are explained below.
1、人工智能:1. Artificial Intelligence:
人工智能,可以理解为机器具有学习能力,能积累经验,解决人类通过经验可以解决的诸如自然语言理解、图像识别和下棋等问题。人工智能,还可以理解为由人制造出来的机器所表现出来的智能。通常人工智能是指通过计算机程序来呈现人类智能的技术。人工智能的目标包括通过构建具有象征意义的推理或推理的计算机程序来理解智能。Artificial intelligence can be understood as machines having the ability to learn, accumulate experience, and solve problems that humans can solve through experience, such as natural language understanding, image recognition, and chess. Artificial intelligence can also be understood as the intelligence displayed by machines made by humans. Usually artificial intelligence refers to the technology that presents human intelligence through computer programs. The goals of artificial intelligence include understanding intelligence by building computer programs with symbolic reasoning or inference.
2、机器学习(machine learning):2. Machine learning:
机器学习是人工智能的一种实现方式。机器学习是一种能够赋予机器学习的能力,以此让机器完成直接编程无法完成的功能的方法。从实践的意义上来说,机器学习是一种通过利用数据,训练出模型,然后使用模型预测的一种方法。机器学习的方法很多,如神经网络(neural network,NN)、决策树、支持向量机等。机器学习理论主要是设计和分析一些让计算机可以自动学习的算法。机器学习算法是一类从数据中自动分析获得规律,并利用规律对未知数据进行预测的算法。Machine learning is a way to implement artificial intelligence. Machine learning is a method that can give machines the ability to learn, so that machines can complete functions that cannot be completed by direct programming. In a practical sense, machine learning is a method of using data to train a model and then using the model to predict. There are many machine learning methods, such as neural networks (NN), decision trees, support vector machines, etc. Machine learning theory mainly designs and analyzes some algorithms that allow computers to learn automatically. Machine learning algorithms are a type of algorithm that automatically analyzes data to obtain patterns and uses the patterns to predict unknown data.
3、神经网络:3. Neural Networks:
神经网络是机器学习方法的一种具体体现。神经网络是一种模仿动物神经网络行为特征,进行信息处理的数学模型。神经网络的思想来源于大脑组织的神经元结构。每个神经元可对其输入值做加权求和运算,将加权求和运算的结果通过一个激活函数产生输出。Neural network is a specific embodiment of machine learning method. Neural network is a mathematical model that imitates the behavioral characteristics of animal neural network and processes information. The idea of neural network comes from the neuron structure of brain tissue. Each neuron can perform weighted sum operation on its input value, and the result of weighted sum operation is used to generate output through an activation function.
神经网络一般包括多层结构,每层可包括一个或多个逻辑判断单元,这种逻辑判断单元可被称为神经元(neuron)。通过增加神经网络的深度和/或宽度可以提高该神经网络的表达能力,为复杂系统提供 更强大的信息提取和抽象建模能力。其中,神经网络的深度可以理解为神经网络包括的层数,每层包括的神经元个数可以称为该层的宽度。一种可能的实现方式,神经网络包括输入层和输出层。神经网络的输入层将接收到的输入经过神经元处理后,将结果传递给输出层,由输出层得到神经网络的输出结果。另一种可能的实现方式,神经网络包括输入层、隐藏层和输出层。神经网络的输入层将接收到的输入经过神经元处理后,将结果传递给中间的隐藏层,隐藏层再将计算结果传递给输出层或者相邻的隐藏层,最后由输出层得到神经网络的输出结果。一个神经网络可以包括一层或多层依次连接的隐藏层,不予限制。A neural network generally includes a multi-layer structure, each layer of which may include one or more logic judgment units, which may be called neurons. By increasing the depth and/or width of a neural network, the expressive power of the neural network can be improved, providing a basis for complex systems. More powerful information extraction and abstract modeling capabilities. Among them, the depth of the neural network can be understood as the number of layers included in the neural network, and the number of neurons included in each layer can be called the width of the layer. In one possible implementation, the neural network includes an input layer and an output layer. The input layer of the neural network processes the received input through neurons and passes the result to the output layer, and the output layer obtains the output result of the neural network. In another possible implementation, the neural network includes an input layer, a hidden layer, and an output layer. The input layer of the neural network processes the received input through neurons and passes the result to the middle hidden layer, and the hidden layer then passes the calculation result to the output layer or the adjacent hidden layer, and finally the output layer obtains the output result of the neural network. A neural network can include one or more hidden layers connected in sequence without restriction.
在神经网络的训练过程中,可以定义损失函数。损失函数用于衡量模型的预测值和真实值之间的差别。在神经网络的训练过程中,损失函数描述了神经网络的输出值和理想目标值之间的差距或差异。神经网络的训练过程就是通过调整神经网络参数,使得损失函数的值小于阈值门限值或者满足目标需求的过程。其中,神经网络参数可以包括以下至少一项:神经网络的层数、宽度、神经元的权值、神经元的激活函数中的参数。During the training process of a neural network, a loss function can be defined. The loss function is used to measure the difference between the predicted value of the model and the true value. During the training process of a neural network, the loss function describes the gap or difference between the output value of the neural network and the ideal target value. The training process of a neural network is to adjust the parameters of the neural network so that the value of the loss function is less than the threshold value or meets the target requirements. Among them, the neural network parameters may include at least one of the following: the number of layers of the neural network, the width, the weight of the neuron, and the parameters in the activation function of the neuron.
4、AI模型:4. AI Model:
AI模型是能实现AI功能的算法或者计算机程序,AI模型表征了模型的输入和输出之间的映射关系,或者说AI模型是将一定维度的输入映射到一定维度的输出的函数模型,函数模型的参数可通过机器学习训练得到。例如,f(x)=ax2+b是一个二次函数模型,它可以看作一个AI模型,a和b为该AI模型的参数,a和b可以通过机器学习训练得到。示例性地,本申请下文实施例中提及的AI模型不限于为神经网络、线性回归模型、决策树模型、支持向量机(support vector machine,SVM)、贝叶斯网络、Q学习模型或者其它机器学习(machine learning,ML)模型。An AI model is an algorithm or computer program that can implement AI functions. The AI model characterizes the mapping relationship between the input and output of the model, or the AI model is a function model that maps an input of a certain dimension to an output of a certain dimension, and the parameters of the function model can be obtained through machine learning training. For example, f(x)=ax2+b is a quadratic function model, which can be regarded as an AI model. a and b are the parameters of the AI model, and a and b can be obtained through machine learning training. Exemplarily, the AI models mentioned in the embodiments below of the present application are not limited to neural networks, linear regression models, decision tree models, support vector machines (SVM), Bayesian networks, Q learning models or other machine learning (ML) models.
AI模型设计主要包括数据收集环节(例如,收集训练数据和/或推理数据)、模型训练环节以及模型推理环节。进一步地还可以包括推理结果应用环节。在前述数据收集环节中,数据源(data source)用于提供训练数据集和推理数据。在模型训练环节中,通过对数据源提供的训练数据(training data)进行分析或训练,得到AI模型。通过模型训练节点学习得到AI模型,相当于利用训练数据学习得到AI模型的输入和输出之间的映射关系。在模型推理环节中,使用经由模型训练环节训练后的AI模型,基于数据源提供的推理数据进行推理,得到推理结果。该环节还可以理解为:将推理数据输入到AI模型,通过AI模型得到输出,该输出即为推理结果。该推理结果可以指示:由执行对象使用(执行)的配置参数、和/或由执行对象执行的操作。在推理结果应用环节中进行推理结果的发布,例如推理结果可以由执行(actor)实体统一规划,例如执行实体可以发送推理结果给一个或多个执行对象(例如,核心网设备、接入网设备、或终端设备等)去执行。又如执行实体还可以反馈AI模型的性能给数据源,便于后续实施AI模型的更新训练。AI model design mainly includes data collection (for example, collecting training data and/or inference data), model training and model inference. It can also include the application of inference results. In the aforementioned data collection link, the data source is used to provide training data sets and inference data. In the model training link, the AI model is obtained by analyzing or training the training data provided by the data source. Learning the AI model through the model training node is equivalent to using the training data to learn the mapping relationship between the input and output of the AI model. In the model inference link, the AI model trained through the model training link is used to perform inference based on the inference data provided by the data source to obtain the inference result. This link can also be understood as: inputting the inference data into the AI model, and obtaining the output through the AI model, which is the inference result. The inference result can indicate: the configuration parameters used (executed) by the execution object, and/or the operation performed by the execution object. The reasoning results are published in the reasoning result application link. For example, the reasoning results can be uniformly planned by the execution (actor) entity. For example, the execution entity can send the reasoning results to one or more execution objects (for example, core network equipment, access network equipment, or terminal equipment, etc.) for execution. For another example, the execution entity can also feedback the performance of the AI model to the data source to facilitate the subsequent update and training of the AI model.
可以理解,AI模型的实现可以是硬件电路,也可以是软件,或者也可以是软件和硬件结合的方式,不予限制。软件的非限制性示例包括:程序代码、程序、子程序、指令、指令集、代码、代码段、软件模块、应用程序、或软件应用程序等。It is understood that the implementation of the AI model can be a hardware circuit, or software, or a combination of software and hardware, without limitation. Non-limiting examples of software include: program code, program, subroutine, instruction, instruction set, code, code segment, software module, application, or software application, etc.
5、双端模型:5. Double-ended model:
双端模型也可以称为双边模型、协作模型、对偶模型或双端(two-side)模型等。双端模型指的是由多个子模型组合在一起构成的一个模型。构成该模型的多个子模型需要相互匹配。该多个子模型可以部署于不同的节点中。The two-end model can also be called a bilateral model, a collaborative model, a dual model, or a two-side model. The two-end model refers to a model composed of multiple sub-models. The multiple sub-models that constitute the model need to match each other. The multiple sub-models can be deployed in different nodes.
本申请实施例中涉及用于压缩CSI的编码器和用于恢复压缩CSI的解码器。编码器与解码器匹配使用,可以理解编码器和解码器为配套的AI模型。一个编码器可以包括一个或多个AI模型,该编码器匹配的解码器中也包括一个或多个AI模型,匹配使用的编码器和解码器中包括的AI模型数量相同且一一对应。The embodiments of the present application involve an encoder for compressing CSI and a decoder for recovering compressed CSI. The encoder and the decoder are used in matching manner, and it can be understood that the encoder and the decoder are matching AI models. An encoder may include one or more AI models, and the decoder matched by the encoder also includes one or more AI models. The number of AI models included in the matching encoder and decoder is the same and corresponds one to one.
一种可能的设计中,一套匹配使用的编码器(encoder)和解码器(decoder)可以具体为同一个自编码器(auto-encoders,AE)中的两个部分,例如,如图5所示。编码器和解码器分别部署于不同的节点的AE模型是一种典型的双边模型。AE模型的编码器和解码器通常是共同训练的编码器与解码器匹配使用。编码器对输入V进行处理,以得到处理后的结果z,解码器能够将编码器的输出z再解码为期望的输出V’。In one possible design, a set of matched encoders and decoders can be specifically two parts of the same auto-encoder (AE), for example, as shown in Figure 5. The AE model in which the encoder and decoder are deployed on different nodes is a typical bilateral model. The encoder and decoder of the AE model are usually a jointly trained encoder and decoder. The encoder processes the input V to obtain the processed result z, and the decoder can decode the encoder output z into the desired output V'.
自编码器是一种无监督学习的神经网络,它的特点是将输入数据作为标签数据,因此自编码器也可以理解为自监督学习的神经网络。自编码器可以用于数据的压缩和恢复。示例性地,自编码器中的编码 器可以对数据A进行压缩(编码)处理,得到数据B;自编码器中的解码器可以对数据B进行解压缩(解码)处理,恢复出数据A。或者可以理解为,解码器是编码器的逆操作。An autoencoder is a neural network for unsupervised learning. Its characteristic is that it uses input data as label data. Therefore, an autoencoder can also be understood as a neural network for self-supervised learning. An autoencoder can be used for data compression and recovery. For example, the encoding in an autoencoder The encoder can compress (encode) data A to obtain data B; the decoder in the autoencoder can decompress (decode) data B to restore data A. Or it can be understood that the decoder is the inverse operation of the encoder.
示例性地,本申请实施例中的AI模型可以包括编码器和解码器。编码器与解码器匹配使用,可以理解编码器和解码器为配套的AI模型。编码器和解码器可以分别部署于终端设备和网络设备。Exemplarily, the AI model in the embodiment of the present application may include an encoder and a decoder. The encoder and the decoder are used in combination, and it can be understood that the encoder and the decoder are matching AI models. The encoder and the decoder can be deployed on the terminal device and the network device respectively.
可替换地,本申请实施例中的AI模型可以为单端模型,该AI模型可以部署于终端设备或网络设备。Alternatively, the AI model in the embodiment of the present application may be a single-end model, which may be deployed on a terminal device or a network device.
6、信道状态信息:6. Channel status information:
在通信系统(例如,LTE通信系统或NR通信系统等)中,网络设备需要基于CSI决定调度终端设备的下行数据信道的资源、MCS以及预编码等配置。可以理解,CSI属于一种信道信息,是一种能够反映信道特征、信道质量的信息。In a communication system (e.g., an LTE communication system or an NR communication system), network equipment needs to decide on the resource, MCS, and precoding configuration of the downlink data channel of the terminal device based on CSI. It can be understood that CSI is a type of channel information, which is information that can reflect channel characteristics and channel quality.
CSI测量指的是接收端根据发送端发送的参考信号求解信道信息,即利用信道估计方法估计出信道信息。示例性地,参考信号可以包括信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)、同步信号/广播信道块(synchronizing signal/physical broadcast channel block,SSB)、信道探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)或解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)等中的一项或多项。CSI-RS、SSB以及DMRS等可以用于测量下行CSI。SRS和DMRS等可以用于测量上行CSI。CSI measurement refers to the receiver solving the channel information based on the reference signal sent by the transmitter, that is, estimating the channel information using the channel estimation method. Exemplarily, the reference signal may include one or more of the channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (SSB), sounding reference signal (SRS) or demodulation reference signal (DMRS). CSI-RS, SSB and DMRS can be used to measure downlink CSI. SRS and DMRS can be used to measure uplink CSI.
以FDD通信场景为例,在FDD通信场景中,由于上下行信道不具备互易性或者说无法保证上下行信道的互易性,网络设备通常会向终端设备下行参考信号,终端设备根据接收到的下行参考信号进行信道测量、干扰测量估计下行CSI。终端设备根据协议预定义的方式或网络设备配置的方式生成CSI报告,并反馈给网络设备,以使其获取下行CSI。Taking the FDD communication scenario as an example, in the FDD communication scenario, since the uplink and downlink channels are not reciprocal or cannot be guaranteed, the network equipment usually sends a downlink reference signal to the terminal device, and the terminal device performs channel measurement and interference measurement based on the received downlink reference signal to estimate the downlink CSI. The terminal device generates a CSI report according to the protocol predefined method or the network device configuration method, and feeds it back to the network device so that it can obtain the downlink CSI.
示例性地,CSI可以包括以下至少一项:信道质量指示(channel quality indication,CQI)、预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI)、秩指示(rank indicator,RI)、CSI-RS资源指示(CSI-RS resource indicator,CRI)、层指示(layer indicator,LI),参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)或信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR)等。信号与干扰加噪声比也可以称为信干噪比。Exemplarily, CSI may include at least one of the following: channel quality indication (CQI), precoding matrix indicator (PMI), rank indicator (RI), CSI-RS resource indicator (CRI), layer indicator (LI), reference signal receiving power (RSRP) or signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), etc. The signal to interference plus noise ratio may also be called signal to interference plus noise ratio.
其中,RI用于指示终端设备建议的下行传输的层数,CQI用于指示终端设备判断的当前信道条件所能支持的调制编码方式,PMI用于指示终端设备建议的预编码。PMI所指示的预编码的层数与RI对应。Among them, RI is used to indicate the number of downlink transmission layers recommended by the terminal device, CQI is used to indicate the modulation and coding mode supported by the current channel conditions determined by the terminal device, and PMI is used to indicate the precoding recommended by the terminal device. The number of precoding layers indicated by PMI corresponds to RI.
应理解,上述CSI报告所指示的RI、CQI和PMI等仅为终端设备的建议值,网络设备可以按照该CSI报告所指示的信息中的部分或全部进行下行传输。或者,网络设备也可以不按照该CSI报告所指示的信息进行下行传输。It should be understood that the RI, CQI and PMI indicated in the above CSI report are only recommended values for the terminal device, and the network device may perform downlink transmission according to part or all of the information indicated in the CSI report. Alternatively, the network device may not perform downlink transmission according to the information indicated in the CSI report.
将AI技术引入无线通信网络中,产生了一种基于AI模型的CSI反馈方式。终端设备利用AI模型对CSI进行压缩反馈,网络设备利用AI模型对压缩的CSI进行恢复。在基于AI的CSI反馈中传输的是一个序列(如比特序列),开销相较于传统CSI反馈CSI的开销低。The introduction of AI technology into wireless communication networks has resulted in a CSI feedback method based on the AI model. The terminal device uses the AI model to compress and feedback the CSI, and the network device uses the AI model to restore the compressed CSI. In the AI-based CSI feedback, a sequence (such as a bit sequence) is transmitted, and the overhead is lower than that of traditional CSI feedback.
以图5为例,图5示出了本申请实施例的一种CSI压缩反馈示意图。图5中的编码器可以为CSI生成器,解码器可以为CSI重构器。编码器可以部署于终端设备中,解码器可以部署于网络设备中。终端设备可以将CSI原始信息V通过编码器生成CSI反馈信息z。终端设备上报CSI报告,该CSI报告可以包括CSI反馈信息z。网络设备可以通过解码器重构CSI信息,即得到CSI恢复信息V’。Taking Figure 5 as an example, Figure 5 shows a schematic diagram of CSI compression feedback of an embodiment of the present application. The encoder in Figure 5 can be a CSI generator, and the decoder can be a CSI reconstructor. The encoder can be deployed in a terminal device, and the decoder can be deployed in a network device. The terminal device can generate CSI feedback information z from the CSI original information V through the encoder. The terminal device reports a CSI report, which may include the CSI feedback information z. The network device can reconstruct the CSI information through the decoder, that is, obtain the CSI recovery information V'.
CSI原始信息V可以是终端设备通过CSI测量得到的。例如,该CSI原始信息V可以包括下行信道的信道响应或下行信道的特征向量矩阵(由特征向量构成的矩阵)。编码器对下行信道的特征向量矩阵进行处理,以得到CSI反馈信息z。换言之,将相关方案中根据码本对特征矩阵进行压缩和/或量化操作替换为由编码器对特征矩阵进行处理的操作,以得到CSI反馈信息z。终端设备上报该CSI反馈信息z。网络设备通过解码器对CSI反馈信息z进行处理以得到CSI恢复信息V’。The CSI original information V may be obtained by the terminal device through CSI measurement. For example, the CSI original information V may include the channel response of the downlink channel or the eigenvector matrix (a matrix composed of eigenvectors) of the downlink channel. The encoder processes the eigenvector matrix of the downlink channel to obtain CSI feedback information z. In other words, the compression and/or quantization operation of the characteristic matrix according to the codebook in the related scheme is replaced by the operation of processing the characteristic matrix by the encoder to obtain CSI feedback information z. The terminal device reports the CSI feedback information z. The network device processes the CSI feedback information z through a decoder to obtain CSI recovery information V'.
下面进一步对本申请实施例中的AI模型的训练过程以及推理过程进行示例性说明。The following further illustrates the training process and reasoning process of the AI model in the embodiment of the present application.
用于训练AI模型的训练数据包括训练样本和样本标签。示例性地,训练样本为终端设备确定的信道信息,样本标签为真实的信道信息,即真值CSI。对于编码器和解码器属于同一自编码器的情况,训练数据可以仅包括训练样本,或者说训练样本就是样本标签。The training data used to train the AI model includes training samples and sample labels. For example, the training samples are channel information determined by the terminal device, and the sample labels are real channel information, i.e., true CSI. In the case where the encoder and decoder belong to the same autoencoder, the training data may only include training samples, or the training samples are sample labels.
在无线通信领域,真值CSI可以为高精度的CSI。In the field of wireless communications, the true CSI may be a high-precision CSI.
具体训练过程如下:模型训练节点使用编码器处理信道信息,即训练样本,以得到CSI反馈信息,并使用解码器处理反馈信息,得到恢复的信道信息,即CSI恢复信息。进而计算CSI恢复信息与对应的样本标签之间的差异,即损失函数的取值,根据损失函数的取值更新编码器和解码器的参数,使得恢复的信 道信息与对应的样本标签之间的差异最小化,即最小化损失函数。示例性地,损失函数可以是最小均方误差(mean square error,MSE)或者余弦相似度。重复上述操作,即可得到满足目标需求的编码器和解码器。上述模型训练节点可以是终端设备、网络设备或者通信系统中其他具备AI功能的网元。The specific training process is as follows: the model training node uses the encoder to process the channel information, that is, the training samples, to obtain CSI feedback information, and uses the decoder to process the feedback information to obtain the restored channel information, that is, the CSI restored information. Then, the difference between the CSI restored information and the corresponding sample label is calculated, that is, the value of the loss function, and the parameters of the encoder and decoder are updated according to the value of the loss function so that the restored information The difference between the channel information and the corresponding sample label is minimized, that is, the loss function is minimized. Exemplarily, the loss function can be the minimum mean square error (MSE) or cosine similarity. Repeating the above operation can obtain an encoder and decoder that meet the target requirements. The above model training node can be a terminal device, a network device, or other network elements with AI functions in the communication system.
应理解,以上仅以AI模型用于CSI压缩为例进行说明,在CSI反馈中,AI模型还可以用于其他场景。例如,AI模型可以用于CSI预测,即基于一个或多个历史时刻测量的信道信息预测未来一个或多个时刻的信道信息。本申请实施例对CSI反馈场景中,AI模型的具体用途不做限定。It should be understood that the above only uses the AI model for CSI compression as an example. In CSI feedback, the AI model can also be used in other scenarios. For example, the AI model can be used for CSI prediction, that is, predicting the channel information at one or more future moments based on the channel information measured at one or more historical moments. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific use of the AI model in the CSI feedback scenario.
7、天线端口:7. Antenna port:
天线端口是一个逻辑概念,一个天线端口与一个物理天线没有直接对应关系。天线端口通常和参考信号关联,其意义可以理解为参考信号所经历的信道上的一个收发接口。对于低频,一个天线端口可能对应一个或多个天线阵元,这些阵元联合发送参考信号,接收端可以把它们当作一个整体,不需要区分这些阵元。对于高频系统,天线端口可能对应着一个波束,同样的,接收端只需要将这个波束视为一个接口,不需要区分每个阵元。Antenna port is a logical concept. There is no direct correspondence between an antenna port and a physical antenna. Antenna port is usually associated with reference signal, and its meaning can be understood as a transceiver interface on the channel through which the reference signal passes. For low frequency, an antenna port may correspond to one or more antenna elements, which jointly send reference signals. The receiving end can treat them as a whole without distinguishing these elements. For high frequency systems, antenna port may correspond to a beam. Similarly, the receiving end only needs to regard this beam as an interface without distinguishing each element.
8、端口组:8. Port Group:
端口组指代天线端口组/参考信号端口组,一个端口组可包含多个参考信号,在本发明中用端口组的概念指代基站用同一个模拟权/模拟波束发送的多个参考信号,故在本发明中,基站可用一个或多个参考信号端口组测量一个模拟波束下的信道信息。The port group refers to the antenna port group/reference signal port group. A port group can contain multiple reference signals. In the present invention, the concept of port group refers to multiple reference signals sent by the base station using the same analog weight/analog beam. Therefore, in the present invention, the base station can use one or more reference signal port groups to measure the channel information under an analog beam.
9、波束(beam):9. Beam:
波束是一种通信资源。波束可以是宽波束,或者窄波束,或者其他类型波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束成形技术或者其他技术手段。波束成形技术可以具体为数字波束成形技术,模拟波束成形技术,混合数字/模拟波束成形技术。不同的波束可以认为是不同的资源。通过不同的波束可以发送相同的信息或者不同的信息。可选的,可以将具有相同或者类似的通信特征的多个波束视为是一个波束。一个波束内可以包括一个或多个天线端口,用于传输数据信道,控制信道和探测信号等,例如,发射波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布,接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。可以理解的是,形成一个波束的一个或多个天线端口也可以看作是一个天线端口集。波束在协议中的体现还是可以空域滤波器(spatial filter)。A beam is a communication resource. A beam can be a wide beam, a narrow beam, or other types of beams. The technology for forming a beam can be a beamforming technology or other technical means. The beamforming technology can be specifically digital beamforming technology, analog beamforming technology, and hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources. The same information or different information can be sent through different beams. Optionally, multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics can be regarded as a beam. A beam can include one or more antenna ports for transmitting data channels, control channels, and detection signals. For example, a transmit beam can refer to the distribution of signal strength formed in different directions of space after the signal is transmitted by the antenna, and a receive beam can refer to the distribution of signal strength of wireless signals received from the antenna in different directions of space. It can be understood that one or more antenna ports that form a beam can also be regarded as an antenna port set. The embodiment of the beam in the protocol can still be a spatial filter.
10、参考信号:10. Reference signal:
根据长期演进LTE/NR的协议,在物理层,上行通信包括上行物理信道和上行信号的传输。其中上行物理信道包括随机接入信道(random access channel,PRACH),上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH),上行数据信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)等,上行信号包括信道探测信号SRS,上行控制信道解调参考信号(PUCCH de-modulation reference signal,PUCCH-DMRS),上行数据信道解调参考信号PUSCH-DMRS,上行相位噪声跟踪信号(phase noise tracking reference signal,PTRS),上行定位信号(uplink positioning RS)等等。下行通信包括下行物理信道和下行信号的传输。其中下行物理信道包括广播信道(physical broadcast channel,PBCH),下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH),下行数据信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)等,下行信号包括主同步信号(primary synchronization signal,PSS)/辅同步信号(secondary synchronization signal,SSS),下行控制信道解调参考信号PDCCH-DMRS,下行数据信道解调参考信号PDSCH-DMRS,相位噪声跟踪信号PTRS,信道状态信息参考信号(channel status information reference signal,CSI-RS),小区信号(cell reference signal,CRS),精同步信号(time/frequency tracking reference signal,TRS),LTE/NR定位信号(positioning RS)等。According to the Long Term Evolution LTE/NR protocol, at the physical layer, uplink communication includes the transmission of uplink physical channels and uplink signals. The uplink physical channels include random access channel (PRACH), uplink control channel (PUCCH), uplink data channel (PUSCH), etc. The uplink signals include channel sounding signal SRS, uplink control channel demodulation reference signal (PUCCH de-modulation reference signal, PUCCH-DMRS), uplink data channel demodulation reference signal PUSCH-DMRS, uplink phase noise tracking signal (PTRS), uplink positioning signal (uplink positioning RS), etc. Downlink communication includes the transmission of downlink physical channels and downlink signals. The downlink physical channels include physical broadcast channel (PBCH), downlink control channel (PDCCH), downlink data channel (PDSCH), etc. The downlink signals include primary synchronization signal (PSS)/secondary synchronization signal (SSS), downlink control channel demodulation reference signal PDCCH-DMRS, downlink data channel demodulation reference signal PDSCH-DMRS, phase noise tracking signal PTRS, channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS), cell signal (CRS), time/frequency tracking reference signal (TRS), LTE/NR positioning signal (positioning RS), etc.
11、预编码和码本:11. Precoding and codebook:
采用多输入多输出(multiple input multiple output,MIMO)技术增加系统容量,提升吞吐率。数学表达式为y=Hx+n,其中y为接收信号,H为MIMO信道,x为发送信号,n为噪声。在具有多天线的通信系统中,多个发送天线的信号会叠加到任意一个接收天线上,因此发送端发送信号的方法影响到系统的性能,而且在接收端恢复发送信号时,往往比较复杂。在这个背景下,预编码(precoding)一方面用于减少系统开销,最大提升MIMO的系统容量,另一方面用于降低接收机消除信道间影响实现的复杂度。此时,数学表达为y=Hx+n,P为预编码矩阵(或向量)。为了简化实现复杂度,P为可以从一个预定义的矩阵(或向量)集合中选取,该集合被称为码本(codebook),该方法也被称为基于码本的发送方法。如果发送端可以获知H的全部信息,则P可以在发送端自行获取,该方法也被称为非码本的发送方 法(non-codebook,NCB)。The multiple input multiple output (MIMO) technology is used to increase system capacity and improve throughput. The mathematical expression is y=Hx+n, where y is the received signal, H is the MIMO channel, x is the transmitted signal, and n is the noise. In a communication system with multiple antennas, the signals of multiple transmitting antennas will be superimposed on any receiving antenna. Therefore, the method of transmitting the signal at the transmitter affects the performance of the system, and it is often complicated to restore the transmitted signal at the receiving end. In this context, precoding is used to reduce system overhead and maximize the system capacity of MIMO on the one hand, and to reduce the complexity of the receiver to eliminate the impact between channels on the other hand. At this time, the mathematical expression is y=Hx+n, and P is the precoding matrix (or vector). In order to simplify the implementation complexity, P can be selected from a predefined set of matrices (or vectors), which is called a codebook. This method is also called a codebook-based transmission method. If the transmitter can obtain all the information of H, P can be obtained by itself at the transmitter. This method is also called a non-codebook transmitter. law (non-codebook, NCB).
应理解,本申请中,指示包括直接指示(也称为显式指示)和隐式指示。其中,直接指示信息A,是指包括该信息A;隐式指示信息A,是指通过信息A和信息B的对应关系以及直接指示信息B,来指示信息A。其中,信息A和信息B的对应关系可以是预定义的,预存储的,预烧制的,或者,预先配置的。It should be understood that in the present application, indication includes direct indication (also called explicit indication) and implicit indication. Wherein, direct indication of information A means including the information A; implicit indication of information A means indicating information A through the correspondence between information A and information B and direct indication of information B. Wherein, the correspondence between information A and information B can be predefined, pre-stored, pre-burned, or pre-configured.
应理解,本申请中,信息C用于信息D的确定,既包括信息D仅基于信息C来确定,也包括基于信息C和其他信息来确定。此外,信息C用于信息D的确定,还可以间接确定的情况,比如,信息D基于信息E确定,而信息E基于信息C确定这种情况。It should be understood that in the present application, information C is used to determine information D, which includes information D being determined based only on information C, and information D being determined based on information C and other information. In addition, information C is used to determine information D, and it can also be indirectly determined, for example, information D is determined based on information E, and information E is determined based on information C.
此外,本申请各实施例中的“网元A向网元B发送信息A”,可以理解为该信息A的目的端或与目的端之间的传输路径中的中间网元是网元B,可以包括直接或间接的向网元B发送信息。“网元B从网元A接收信息A”,可以理解为该信息A的源端或与该源端之间的传输路径中的中间网元是网元A,可以包括直接或间接的从网元A接收信息。信息在信息发送的源端和目的端之间可能会被进行必要的处理,例如格式变化等,但目的端可以理解来自源端的有效信息。本申请中类似的表述可以做类似的理解,在此不予赘述。In addition, "network element A sends information A to network element B" in each embodiment of the present application can be understood as the destination end of the information A or the intermediate network element in the transmission path between the destination end and the network element B, which may include directly or indirectly sending information to network element B. "Network element B receives information A from network element A" can be understood as the source end of the information A or the intermediate network element in the transmission path between the source end and the network element A, which may include directly or indirectly receiving information from network element A. The information may be processed as necessary between the source end and the destination end of the information transmission, such as format changes, etc., but the destination end can understand the valid information from the source end. Similar expressions in the present application can be understood similarly and will not be repeated here.
示例性地,网络设备可以为图1所示的核心网设备、接入网节点(RAN节点)或OAM中的一个或多个设备。比如,AI模块可以为图4所示的RIC,如近实时RIC或非实时RIC等。例如,近实时RIC设置在RAN节点中(例如,CU,DU中),而非实时RIC设置在OAM中、云服务器中、核心网设备、或者其他网络设备中。RIC可以通过从RAN节点(例如CU、CU-CP、CU-UP、DU和/或RU)获得来自多个终端设备的子集,重组为训练数据集#2,并基于训练数据集#2进行训练。Exemplarily, the network device may be a core network device, an access network node (RAN node) or one or more devices in OAM as shown in FIG. 1. For example, the AI module may be the RIC shown in FIG. 4, such as a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC. For example, the near real-time RIC is set in a RAN node (e.g., in a CU, DU), while the non-real-time RIC is set in an OAM, a cloud server, a core network device, or other network devices. RIC can be obtained by obtaining subsets from multiple terminal devices from a RAN node (e.g., a CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU and/or RU), reorganized into a training data set #2, and trained based on the training data set #2.
示例性地,近实时RIC,非实时RIC也可以分别作为一个网元单独设置,网络设备可以为近实时RIC或非实时RIC。Exemplarily, the near real-time RIC and the non-real-time RIC may also be separately configured as a network element, and the network device may be the near real-time RIC or the non-real-time RIC.
目前,在较高频段的通信系统中,网络设备(以及部分频段的终端)通常都会使用大规模阵列天线(例如包括500~1000个天线单元),通过较高的阵列增益对抗频段升高带来的路径损耗,提升覆盖能力。从网络设备的实现方式来看,同样是大阵列,不同频段不同阵列规模使用的阵列加权方式(即波束成形方式不同),按照波束成形的实现方案,大致分为以下三类:At present, in communication systems with higher frequency bands, network equipment (and terminals in some frequency bands) usually use large-scale array antennas (for example, 500 to 1000 antenna units) to counteract the path loss caused by the increase in frequency bands through higher array gain and improve coverage. From the perspective of the implementation of network equipment, the same large array, different frequency bands and different array sizes use different array weighting methods (that is, different beamforming methods). According to the implementation scheme of beamforming, it can be roughly divided into the following three categories:
第一类:数字波束成形(digital beamforming,DBF),每一个或一组天线单元直接连接一个数字通道。由于每个天线信号直接被转换到数字域,后续的阵列加权都在数字域进行,因此被称为数字波束成型。数字域信号处理的自由度高,可以支持复杂的信号处理方式,因此在同样的阵列规模下,DBF架构的性能好。另一方面,由于数模/模数转换器(ADC/DAC)功耗和成本较高(尤其是大带宽条件下),阵列规模相同条件下,DBF的成本较高。The first category: digital beamforming (DBF), each antenna unit or a group of antenna units is directly connected to a digital channel. Since each antenna signal is directly converted to the digital domain, the subsequent array weighting is performed in the digital domain, so it is called digital beamforming. The digital domain signal processing has a high degree of freedom and can support complex signal processing methods. Therefore, under the same array scale, the performance of the DBF architecture is good. On the other hand, due to the high power consumption and cost of the digital-to-analog/analog-to-digital converter (ADC/DAC) (especially under large bandwidth conditions), the cost of DBF is higher under the same array scale.
第二类:模拟波束成形(analog beamforming,ABF),每一个或一组天线单元连接一个模拟移相器,多个天线单元在模拟域上进行合并后通过一个数模/模数转换器。与DBF相比,ABF整个阵列只对应了一个数模/模数转换器,ABF架构优势在于成本和功耗低。但是模拟域的移相器设置决定了波束成形后的波束方向,由于信号在模拟域直接进行电信号合并,无法如DBF利用数字信号处理加权,ABF要在收发时预先配置好移相器设置(即将模拟波束指向目标终端),这一过程需要在链路建立阶段通过波束扫描完成,带来额外的时延。同时,一旦模拟波束遮挡或移动造成未对准,系统的链路质量会迅速降低甚至终端,因此ABF的通信可靠性可能不如DBF。The second category: analog beamforming (ABF), each or a group of antenna units is connected to an analog phase shifter, and multiple antenna units are combined in the analog domain and then passed through a digital-to-analog/analog-to-digital converter. Compared with DBF, the entire ABF array corresponds to only one digital-to-analog/analog-to-digital converter. The advantages of the ABF architecture are low cost and power consumption. However, the phase shifter setting in the analog domain determines the direction of the beam after beamforming. Since the signal is directly combined as an electrical signal in the analog domain, it is impossible to use digital signal processing weighting like DBF. ABF must pre-configure the phase shifter setting during transmission and reception (that is, point the analog beam to the target terminal). This process needs to be completed through beam scanning during the link establishment phase, which brings additional delays. At the same time, once the analog beam is blocked or moved to cause misalignment, the link quality of the system will rapidly degrade or even terminate, so the communication reliability of ABF may not be as good as DBF.
第三类:混合波束成形(hybrid beamforming,HBF),是ABF和DBF的中间形态,HBF一方面有一定数量的数字端口,支持数字波束成型,同时每个数字端口驱动了一个ABF子阵。与ABF相比,相同阵列规模下,每个数字通道驱动的模拟子阵规模更小,因此波束更宽,可靠性更好,波束扫描开销更小。HBF数字端口和模拟移相器比例随不同频率和系统设计需求配置不一,例如高频段数字端口数很小(4~16),单个数字通道对应的模拟移相器较多(16~32),而更接近ABF,而低频段系统数字端口较多(32~128),单个数字通道模拟移相器更少(2~10)。The third category: hybrid beamforming (HBF) is an intermediate form between ABF and DBF. On the one hand, HBF has a certain number of digital ports to support digital beamforming, and each digital port drives an ABF subarray. Compared with ABF, at the same array scale, the analog subarray driven by each digital channel is smaller, so the beam is wider, the reliability is better, and the beam scanning overhead is smaller. The ratio of HBF digital ports and analog phase shifters varies with different frequencies and system design requirements. For example, the number of digital ports in the high-frequency band is very small (4 to 16), and the analog phase shifters corresponding to a single digital channel are more (16 to 32), which is closer to ABF, while the low-frequency band system has more digital ports (32 to 128) and fewer analog phase shifters (2 to 10) for a single digital channel.
其中,HBF与ABF架构都有模拟波束,只有当模拟波束对齐通信目标时,信号质量更佳。模拟波束的方向(由波束权值确定)需要在收发前就配置。对于某个终端设备,网络设备选择模拟波束的过程叫做波束训练或波束扫描。波束扫描通常通过网络设备使用不同模拟波束权值发送参考信号,终端设备分别对参考信号进行测量,反馈其测量结果来协助网络设备判断出波束质量最佳的波束。Among them, both HBF and ABF architectures have analog beams. Only when the analog beam is aligned with the communication target, the signal quality is better. The direction of the analog beam (determined by the beam weight) needs to be configured before sending and receiving. For a certain terminal device, the process of network equipment selecting an analog beam is called beam training or beam scanning. Beam scanning usually uses network equipment to send reference signals using different analog beam weights. The terminal equipment measures the reference signals respectively and feeds back its measurement results to assist the network equipment in determining the beam with the best beam quality.
应理解,HBF架构同时具备数字端口与模拟移相器阵列。It should be understood that the HBF architecture has both digital ports and analog phase shifter arrays.
图6示出了一种硬件架构600的示意图。 FIG6 shows a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture 600 .
该架构600为网络设备HBF的硬件结构,终端设备的HBF架构与网络设备的HBF类似,以下以网络设备HBF为例进行说明。该架构包括处理器610,存储器620,信号收发单元630。其中,信号收发单元包括发射机631和接收机632,以及天线633,发射机和接收机通过天线接收和发送信号。其中在天线633模块中,一个方框代表一个数字通道,方框中的F为数字预编码权值;一个移相器(圆圈加斜箭头)代表一个模拟通道,连接一个阵子或者多个阵子,即实际中可以是一个移相器控制多个阵子,或者移相器与阵子之间交叉连接。The architecture 600 is the hardware structure of the network device HBF. The HBF architecture of the terminal device is similar to that of the network device HBF. The network device HBF is used as an example for explanation below. The architecture includes a processor 610, a memory 620, and a signal transceiver unit 630. Among them, the signal transceiver unit includes a transmitter 631 and a receiver 632, as well as an antenna 633. The transmitter and the receiver receive and send signals through the antenna. Among them, in the antenna 633 module, a square box represents a digital channel, and F in the square box is a digital precoding weight; a phase shifter (circle plus oblique arrow) represents an analog channel, connecting one array or multiple arrays, that is, in practice, one phase shifter can control multiple arrays, or the phase shifter and the array can be cross-connected.
因此,在通信过程中,HBF架构会有多个模拟波束可以选择,每一个模拟波束下,用于服务某个终端的数字端口的加权权值和MCS都需要利用CSI信息反馈,这就意味着,网络设备需要指示终端设备对每个模拟波束下的CSI信息分别测量,然后进行反馈。该过程会造成以下问题,首先,终端设备进行反馈时,可能支持的反馈开销不同,对于网络设备,需要配置不同的AI模型来支持不同的上报能力,终端设备使用不同的AI模型进行压缩,因此会增加网络设备和终端设备的存储开销或切换开销。Therefore, during the communication process, the HBF architecture will have multiple analog beams to choose from. Under each analog beam, the weighted value and MCS of the digital port used to serve a terminal need to be fed back using CSI information, which means that the network device needs to instruct the terminal device to measure the CSI information under each analog beam separately and then provide feedback. This process will cause the following problems. First, when the terminal device provides feedback, it may support different feedback overheads. For network devices, different AI models need to be configured to support different reporting capabilities. Terminal devices use different AI models for compression, which will increase the storage overhead or switching overhead of network devices and terminal devices.
进一步的,现有技术中,HBF结构下,多个模拟波束对应的信道信息,需要独立进行测量反馈。在有N个模拟波束的情况下,导致反馈开销需要增加N倍。实际上,多个模拟波束的覆盖区域会有一定重叠,或者多个模拟波束之间的信道信息具有相关性,现有技术没有考虑模拟波束间信道的相关性,导致反馈开销大,效率低。因此,本申请方案需要针对多个模拟波束对应的信道信息进行联合反馈,在该情况下,AI模型需要支持不同模拟波束下的联合压缩,按照现有技术的方案,需要多个不同的AI模型去支持不同的模拟波束压缩,使得实现和协议设计的复杂度大幅增加,同时多个AI模型的存储也会导致终端设备和网络设备的存储成本上升,多个AI模型之间的切换也会增加网络设备和终端设备的切换开销。Furthermore, in the prior art, under the HBF structure, the channel information corresponding to multiple analog beams needs to be measured and fed back independently. When there are N analog beams, the feedback overhead needs to be increased N times. In fact, the coverage areas of multiple analog beams will overlap to a certain extent, or the channel information between multiple analog beams is correlated. The prior art does not consider the correlation between channels between analog beams, resulting in large feedback overhead and low efficiency. Therefore, the present application solution needs to perform joint feedback for the channel information corresponding to multiple analog beams. In this case, the AI model needs to support joint compression under different analog beams. According to the solution of the prior art, multiple different AI models are required to support different analog beam compressions, which greatly increases the complexity of implementation and protocol design. At the same time, the storage of multiple AI models will also lead to an increase in the storage cost of terminal devices and network devices, and switching between multiple AI models will also increase the switching overhead of network devices and terminal devices.
有鉴于此,本申请实施例提供一种用于反馈信道状态的方法及通信装置,能够降低网络设备和终端设备的存储/切换开销。In view of this, an embodiment of the present application provides a method and a communication device for feeding back channel status, which can reduce the storage/switching overhead of network equipment and terminal equipment.
接下来对本申请实施例提供的一种用于反馈信道状态的方法进行说明。本申请提供的实施例可以应用于上述图1和图2所示的通信系统中,不作限定。Next, a method for feeding back channel status provided in an embodiment of the present application is described. The embodiment provided in the present application can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 above, without limitation.
在下文实施例中,作为示例,编码器为终端设备,解码器为网络设备;或者编码器为一终端设备,解码器为另一终端设备;或者,编码器为一网络设备,解码器为另一网络设备;或者,编码器为网络设备,解码器为终端设备,对此不予限制。可以理解,下文中的编码器可替换为编码装置,解码器可替换为解码装置。此外,还可以理解,下文中的编码器可以包括AI模型之外电路,比如处理电路、存储电路、收发电路等等。In the following embodiments, as an example, the encoder is a terminal device and the decoder is a network device; or the encoder is a terminal device and the decoder is another terminal device; or the encoder is a network device and the decoder is another network device; or the encoder is a network device and the decoder is a terminal device, without limitation. It can be understood that the encoder in the following can be replaced by an encoding device, and the decoder can be replaced by a decoding device. In addition, it can also be understood that the encoder in the following can include circuits other than the AI model, such as processing circuits, storage circuits, transceiver circuits, and the like.
在下文实施例中,编码器可部署多套AI模型,这样编码器可基于部署的AI模型进行编码,如对信道信息进行压缩;解码器可部署多套AI模型,这样解码器可基于部署的AI模型进行解码,如对压缩信息进行恢复得到信道信息。下文中为简洁,将编码器部署的AI模型称为编码器的AI模型,解码器部署的AI模型称为解码器的AI模型。In the following embodiments, the encoder may deploy multiple sets of AI models, so that the encoder can encode based on the deployed AI models, such as compressing channel information; the decoder may deploy multiple sets of AI models, so that the decoder can decode based on the deployed AI models, such as recovering compressed information to obtain channel information. For simplicity, the AI model deployed by the encoder is referred to as the AI model of the encoder, and the AI model deployed by the decoder is referred to as the AI model of the decoder.
图7是本申请实施例提供的一种用于反馈信道状态的方法700的示意性流程图。为便于描述,方法700以编码器和解码器作为交互的执行主体为例进行示例性说明。可以理解,该编码器可以是终端设备或终端设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路),该解码器可以是网络设备或网络设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路),或者该编码器或解码器也可以是AI节点或AI节点的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路),不予限定。图7所示的方法700可以包括如下步骤。Figure 7 is a schematic flow chart of a method 700 for feeding back channel status provided by an embodiment of the present application. For ease of description, method 700 is exemplarily illustrated by taking an encoder and a decoder as the execution subject of the interaction. It can be understood that the encoder can be a terminal device or a component of a terminal device (such as a chip or circuit), the decoder can be a network device or a component of a network device (such as a chip or circuit), or the encoder or decoder can also be an AI node or a component of an AI node (such as a chip or circuit), without limitation. The method 700 shown in Figure 7 may include the following steps.
710,编码器对M个信道信息进行压缩,得到第一序列。710. The encoder compresses M channel information to obtain a first sequence.
其中,M个信道信息为终端设备测量的L个信道信息的部分或全部,L个信道信息与L个模拟波束对应,L小于或者等于N,N为基于天线端口组上的参考信号确定的信道信息的个数,N为正整数。Among them, the M channel information is part or all of the L channel information measured by the terminal device, the L channel information corresponds to the L simulated beams, L is less than or equal to N, N is the number of channel information determined based on the reference signal on the antenna port group, and N is a positive integer.
其中N个信道信息对应N个模拟波束,N也可以理解为最大模拟波束的个数。The N channel information corresponds to N simulated beams, and N can also be understood as the maximum number of simulated beams.
本申请中,网络设备和终端设备可以预定义或预先确定联合反馈的最大模拟波束个数N与最大反馈开销X。In the present application, the network device and the terminal device may predefine or predetermine the maximum number of simulated beams N and the maximum feedback overhead X for joint feedback.
其中,最大模拟波束的个数N可以为网络设备确定,例如,网络设备可以配置总模拟波束个数。The maximum number N of simulated beams may be determined by the network device. For example, the network device may configure the total number of simulated beams.
一种可能的实现中,该N个模拟波束互不相同,该N个模拟波束的覆盖范围存在重叠区域。In a possible implementation, the N simulation beams are different from each other, and there is an overlapping area in the coverage range of the N simulation beams.
示例地,该N个模拟波束中部分模拟波束的覆盖范围存在重叠。比如,N取值为5,包括波束A、波束B、波束C、波束D和波束E,其中波束A与波束B的覆盖范围存在重叠。For example, the coverage of some of the N simulated beams overlaps. For example, N is 5, including beam A, beam B, beam C, beam D and beam E, wherein the coverage of beam A and beam B overlaps.
示例地,该N个模拟波束的覆盖范围均存在重叠。比如,N取值为5,包括波束A、波束B、波束C、波束D和波束E,其中5个波束的覆盖范围均存在重叠。 For example, the coverage of the N simulated beams overlaps. For example, N is 5, including beam A, beam B, beam C, beam D and beam E, wherein the coverage of the five beams overlaps.
该N个模拟波束与N个信道信息一一对应。或者说,该N个信道信息为该N模拟波束的信道信息。比如,该信道信息可以是信道状态信息CSI,具体的,可以参考前文CSI的说明,这里不再赘述。The N simulated beams correspond to the N channel information one by one. In other words, the N channel information is the channel information of the N simulated beams. For example, the channel information may be channel state information CSI. For details, please refer to the description of CSI above, which will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实现,该N个信道信息对应N个序号,这N个序号与N个模拟波束一一对应。换句话说,该N个模拟波束与该N个信道信息通过这N个序号关联。例如,N取值为3,三个模拟波束分别为波束A、波束B和波束C,波束A对应序号1,波束B对应序号2,波束C对应序号3。同时,信道信息A对应序号1,信道信息B对应序号2,信道信息C对应序号3,则信道信息A对应波束A,信道信息B对应波束B,信道信息C对应波束C。In a possible implementation, the N channel information corresponds to N serial numbers, and the N serial numbers correspond one-to-one to the N simulated beams. In other words, the N simulated beams are associated with the N channel information through the N serial numbers. For example, N is 3, and the three simulated beams are beam A, beam B, and beam C, beam A corresponds to serial number 1, beam B corresponds to serial number 2, and beam C corresponds to serial number 3. At the same time, channel information A corresponds to serial number 1, channel information B corresponds to serial number 2, and channel information C corresponds to serial number 3, then channel information A corresponds to beam A, channel information B corresponds to beam B, and channel information C corresponds to beam C.
或者说,该N个信道信息与K个端口组对应。该端口组可以是CSI-RS端口组。In other words, the N channel information corresponds to K port groups. The port group may be a CSI-RS port group.
示例地,该K个端口组用于确定K组信道信息,该K组信道信息与N组组合系数确定N组信道信息。其中,N大于或等于K。K为正整数。For example, the K port groups are used to determine K groups of channel information, and the K groups of channel information and N groups of combination coefficients determine N groups of channel information, where N is greater than or equal to K and K is a positive integer.
具体的,下面以预编码矩阵作为信道信息的示例,可以分为以下两种情况:Specifically, the following takes the precoding matrix as an example of channel information, which can be divided into the following two cases:
情况1:N等于K。即K个端口组,用于确定N=K组信道系数。Case 1: N is equal to K. That is, K port groups are used to determine N=K groups of channel coefficients.
例如,网络设备向终端配置N个端口组,每个端口组对应一个模拟波束。该K个端口组用于测量网络设备(比如基站)阵列A1,A2,D1,D2,(水平垂直阵子数、数字端口数)下,N个不同模拟波束(模拟权值分别为{w1,w2,w3,...})下的信道系数{H1,H2,H3,...}。终端再通过svd分解,计算得到N个不同模拟波束下的预编码矩阵{v1,v2,v3,...}。For example, the network device configures N port groups to the terminal, and each port group corresponds to an analog beam. The K port groups are used to measure the channel coefficients {H 1 ,H 2 ,H 3 , ... } under N different analog beams (analog weights are {w 1 ,w 2 ,w 3 ,...}) under the network device (such as base station) arrays A 1 ,A 2 ,D 1 ,D 2 ,(horizontal and vertical array numbers, digital port numbers). The terminal then calculates the precoding matrices {v 1 ,v 2 ,v 3 ,...} under N different analog beams through SVD decomposition.
情况2:N大于K。即K个端口组,用于确定N组信道系数。Case 2: N is greater than K. That is, K port groups are used to determine N groups of channel coefficients.
例如,如图11所示,K个端口组用于获取K个端口组的信道系数(或者信道响应),分别记为h1,h2,h3,...,hk。基于K个端口组的信道信息,以及信道组合系数可以得到N个模拟波束下的信道系数终端再通过svd分解,计算得到N个不同模拟波束下的预编码矩阵{v1,v2,v3,...}。For example, as shown in FIG11 , K port groups are used to obtain channel coefficients (or channel responses) of the K port groups, which are denoted as h 1 , h 2 , h 3 , ..., h k . Based on the channel information of the K port groups and the channel combination coefficients The channel coefficients under N simulated beams can be obtained The terminal then calculates the precoding matrices {v 1 ,v 2 ,v 3 ,...} under N different simulated beams through SVD decomposition.
也即,N个信道信息为N个预编码矩阵时,该N个信道信息是根据N个模拟波束的信道系数分解得到的,或者,N个信道信息是根据K个端口组的信道信息和信道组合系数分解得到的。That is, when the N channel information are N precoding matrices, the N channel information are decomposed according to the channel coefficients of N analog beams, or the N channel information are decomposed according to the channel information of K port groups and the channel combination coefficients.
本申请中,终端设备可以对L个信道信息进行测量,并对其中的M个信道信息进行压缩反馈。In the present application, the terminal device can measure L channel information and compress and feedback M of the channel information.
接下来对从L个信道信息中确定M个信道信息的方式进行示例性说明。Next, a method of determining M channel information from L channel information is exemplified.
本申请中,网络设备或终端设备可以确定上报M个信道信息以及对应的反馈开销Y,该M个信道信息对应M个模拟波束。In the present application, the network device or the terminal device may determine to report M channel information and corresponding feedback overhead Y, where the M channel information corresponds to M simulated beams.
一种实现方式中,网络设备或终端设备可以根据优先级信息确定反馈M个信道信息以及对应的反馈开销Y。In one implementation, the network device or the terminal device may determine to feedback M channel information and the corresponding feedback overhead Y according to the priority information.
其中,优先级信息可以是L个模拟波束对应的优先级。The priority information may be the priorities corresponding to the L simulated beams.
示例性的,网络设备根据L个模拟波束对应的优先级确定M个信道信息以及对应的反馈开销Y。Exemplarily, the network device determines M channel information and corresponding feedback overhead Y according to the priorities corresponding to the L simulated beams.
该情况下,网络设备可以向终端设备指示该M个信道信息与N个信道信息的对应关系。In this case, the network device may indicate to the terminal device the correspondence between the M channel information and the N channel information.
示例性的,终端上报可以根据基于网络设备配置的L个模拟波束对应的优先级以及L个模拟波束的测量结果确定M个信道信息以及对应的反馈开销Y。Exemplarily, the terminal report can determine M channel information and corresponding feedback overhead Y based on the priorities corresponding to L simulated beams configured based on the network device and the measurement results of the L simulated beams.
该情况下,终端设备可以向网络设备指示该M个信道信息与N个信道信息的对应关系。In this case, the terminal device may indicate the correspondence between the M channel information and the N channel information to the network device.
其中,L个信道信息的测量结果包括但不限于CQI、RSRP测量等。The measurement results of the L channel information include but are not limited to CQI, RSRP measurement, etc.
本申请中,确定对M个信道信息进行联合压缩反馈,得到第一序列。In the present application, it is determined to perform joint compression feedback on M channel information to obtain a first sequence.
本申请中,第一序列为M个信道信息的压缩结果,该第一序列为对应N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量。In the present application, the first sequence is a compression result of M channel information, and the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to N channel information.
应理解,该第一序列为N个信道信息维度的联合反馈量。换句话说,该第一序列即可指示N个信道信息。或者说,该第一序列包括N个信道信息。It should be understood that the first sequence is a joint feedback amount of N channel information dimensions. In other words, the first sequence can indicate N channel information. In other words, the first sequence includes N channel information.
该第一序列可以是量化前的序列。比如,第一序列为一维的实数/复数序列。The first sequence may be a sequence before quantization. For example, the first sequence is a one-dimensional real number/complex number sequence.
该第一序列可以是量化后的序列。比如,该第一序列包括X个比特(bit)。The first sequence may be a quantized sequence. For example, the first sequence includes X bits.
以下实施例中,联合反馈量以比特开销为例进行示例性说明,但不作任何限定。In the following embodiments, the joint feedback amount is exemplified by taking bit overhead as an example, but is not limited in any way.
首先,需要说明的是,AI模型的输入输出结果固定,因此编码器的输入端固定为N个模拟波束维度的预编码矩阵,类似的,编码器的输出端输出N个模拟波束维度的输出矩阵。 First of all, it should be noted that the input and output results of the AI model are fixed, so the input of the encoder is fixed to a precoding matrix of N simulated beam dimensions. Similarly, the output of the encoder outputs an output matrix of N simulated beam dimensions.
以下结合图8示出的AI模型设计示意图对本申请中编码器的输入和解码器的输出进行详细说明。The following is a detailed description of the input of the encoder and the output of the decoder in this application in conjunction with the AI model design schematic diagram shown in Figure 8.
如图8所示,编码器的输入为N个波束维度的信道信息,经过编码器的压缩后得到X比特开销的联合反馈量,该联合反馈量输入解码器后,重构得到N个波束维度的信道信息。As shown in FIG8 , the input of the encoder is channel information of N beam dimensions. After compression by the encoder, a joint feedback amount of X bits of overhead is obtained. After the joint feedback amount is input into the decoder, channel information of N beam dimensions is reconstructed.
需要注意的是,在编码器的输入端、输出端以及解码器的输入端、输出端,可以预定义信道信息的堆叠方式,或者说,对不同模拟波束对应的输入矩阵的堆叠方式进行预定义。It should be noted that at the input end and output end of the encoder and the input end and output end of the decoder, the stacking method of the channel information can be predefined, or in other words, the stacking method of the input matrices corresponding to different analog beams can be predefined.
其中,堆叠方式可以理解为待压缩的信道信息对应的模拟波束以一定顺序或排列方式输入到N个模拟波束维度的输入矩阵中。或者说,编码器或解码器的输入/输出端需要部分输入或输出,按照一定的排列规则或位置规则可以保证输入端和输出端的对应关系,从而确保联合压缩重构的性能。The stacking method can be understood as the analog beams corresponding to the channel information to be compressed are input into the input matrix of N analog beam dimensions in a certain order or arrangement. In other words, the input/output end of the encoder or decoder requires partial input or output, and the corresponding relationship between the input end and the output end can be guaranteed according to a certain arrangement rule or position rule, thereby ensuring the performance of joint compression and reconstruction.
例如,在编码器的输入端,将M个模拟波束预编码矩阵填充至编码器输入矩阵的对应波束位置,其余未填充位置可以通过输入固定量的方式对输入矩阵进行填充,得到N波束维度下的输入矩阵并送入编码器进行联合压缩,得到X bits下的全反馈量。For example, at the input end of the encoder, M analog beam precoding matrices are filled into the corresponding beam positions of the encoder input matrix, and the remaining unfilled positions can be filled into the input matrix by inputting a fixed amount to obtain the input matrix under N beam dimensions and send it to the encoder for joint compression to obtain the full feedback amount under X bits.
示例性的,如图8中所示,在编码器的输入端,N个信道信息定义逻辑序号Beam1-Beam N,并与物理意义上的N个模拟波束的位置相绑定,编码器输入端定义N个模拟波束信道信息的堆叠排列方式;然后,将该N个信道信息输入编码器,解码器输出端定义N个模拟波束信道信息的堆叠排列方式。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG8 , at the input end of the encoder, N channel information define logical sequence numbers Beam1-Beam N and are bound to the positions of N analog beams in a physical sense, and the encoder input end defines the stacking arrangement of the N analog beam channel information; then, the N channel information is input into the encoder, and the decoder output end defines the stacking arrangement of the N analog beam channel information.
图9示出了N个模拟波束信道信息在输入输出端的堆叠方式的示意图。其中,N个模拟波束的排列顺序(从1到N)不作限定。Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the stacking mode of the channel information of N simulated beams at the input and output ends, wherein the arrangement order of the N simulated beams (from 1 to N) is not limited.
720,根据第一序列确定第二序列。At 720, determine a second sequence according to the first sequence.
其中,第二序列为对应M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量。The second sequence is Y joint feedback quantities corresponding to M channel information.
应理解,该第二序列为M个信道信息维度的联合反馈量。换句话说,该第二序列即可指示M个信道信息。或者说,该第一序列包括M个信道信息。It should be understood that the second sequence is a joint feedback amount of M channel information dimensions. In other words, the second sequence can indicate M channel information. In other words, the first sequence includes M channel information.
该第二序列可以是量化前的序列。比如,第二序列为一维的实数或者复数序列。The second sequence may be a sequence before quantization. For example, the second sequence is a one-dimensional real number or complex number sequence.
该第二序列可以是量化后的序列。比如,该第二序列包括Y个比特(bit)。The second sequence may be a quantized sequence. For example, the second sequence includes Y bits.
一种实现方式中,根据第一序列确定N个信道信息在编码器输入端的堆叠位置与M个信道信息在编码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系,根据该对应关系确定对应M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量。In one implementation, the correspondence between the stacking positions of N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of M channel information at the encoder input end is determined according to the first sequence, and Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information are determined according to the correspondence.
例如,根据编码器输入端N波束维度下的输入矩阵对应的位置与M个模拟波束预编码矩阵填充至N波束输入矩阵的对应波束位置关系,确定出M个模拟波束预编码矩阵填充至N波束输入矩阵的位置,或者说,排除其余未填充位置,得到Y个部分联合反馈量。For example, based on the relationship between the position corresponding to the input matrix under the N-beam dimension of the encoder input end and the corresponding beam position of the M analog beam precoding matrices filled into the N-beam input matrix, the positions of the M analog beam precoding matrices filled into the N-beam input matrix are determined, or in other words, the remaining unfilled positions are excluded to obtain Y partial joint feedback amounts.
本申请中,第一序列为N个维度的信道信息的联合反馈量,第二序列为M个维度的信道信息的联合反馈量。以下结合图9对第一序列和第二序列的内容进行说明。In the present application, the first sequence is the joint feedback amount of channel information in N dimensions, and the second sequence is the joint feedback amount of channel information in M dimensions. The contents of the first sequence and the second sequence are described below in conjunction with FIG9 .
图10示出了本申请实施例提供的一种可拆分联合反馈示意图。FIG10 shows a schematic diagram of a detachable joint feedback provided in an embodiment of the present application.
如图10所示,N个波束联合反馈量由N+1部分组成,其中,前N部分{X1,X2,...,XN}分别代表N个模拟波束的特定特征,第N+1部分Xcom代表N个模拟波束的公共特征。若终端需上报部分波束信道信息时,仅需上报该部分波束独有特征与N个模拟波束的公共特征对应的反馈量即可。As shown in Figure 10, the joint feedback amount of N beams consists of N+1 parts, where the first N parts {X 1 , X 2 , ..., X N } represent the specific characteristics of the N simulated beams, and the N+1 part X com represents the common characteristics of the N simulated beams. If the terminal needs to report the channel information of some beams, it only needs to report the feedback amount corresponding to the unique characteristics of the partial beams and the common characteristics of the N simulated beams.
本申请中,第一序列包括对应N个波束的Xbits联合反馈量,该Xbits联合反馈量由对应N个信道信息的第一特征和第二特征组成,或者说,第一序列包括N个第一特征和O个第二特征。其中,第一特征指示各信道信息的特定特征,第二特征指示N个信道信息的公共特征。In the present application, the first sequence includes Xbits joint feedback amounts corresponding to N beams, and the Xbits joint feedback amount is composed of the first feature and the second feature corresponding to the N channel information, or in other words, the first sequence includes N first features and O second features. The first feature indicates a specific feature of each channel information, and the second feature indicates a common feature of the N channel information.
其中,特定特征指的是各信道信息独有的特征,公共特征指的是多个信道信息的共有特征,特定特征或公共特征仅为示例的术语名称,本申请对此不作限定。Among them, specific features refer to features unique to each channel information, and common features refer to features shared by multiple channel information. Specific features or common features are merely example terminology names, and this application does not limit them.
第二序列包括对应M个波束的Ybits联合反馈量,该Ybits联合反馈量由对应M个信道信息的第一特征和第二特征组成,或者说,第一序列包括M个第一特征和P个第二特征。其中,第一特征指示各信道信息的特定特征,第二特征指示M个信道信息的公共特征。其中,P小于或者等于O,O可以为1。The second sequence includes Ybits of joint feedback corresponding to M beams, and the Ybits of joint feedback consists of the first feature and the second feature corresponding to the M channel information, or in other words, the first sequence includes M first features and P second features. The first feature indicates a specific feature of each channel information, and the second feature indicates a common feature of the M channel information. P is less than or equal to O, and O can be 1.
一种可能的实现方式中,根据N个信道信息在编码器输入端的堆叠位置与M个信道信息在编码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系从N个第一特征确定M个第一特征,根据N个信道信息在编码器输入端的堆叠位置与M个信道信息在编码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系从O个第二特征中确定出M个信道信息对应的P个第二特征,根据该M个第一特征和P个第二特征确定第二序列。In one possible implementation, M first features are determined from N first features based on a correspondence between the stacking positions of N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of M channel information at the encoder input end, P second features corresponding to the M channel information are determined from O second features based on a correspondence between the stacking positions of N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of M channel information at the encoder input end, and a second sequence is determined based on the M first features and the P second features.
其中,N个第一特征在第一序列中的位置与M个第一特征在第二序列中的位置具有对应关系,O个第二特征在第一序列中的位置与P个第二特征在第二序列中的位置具有对应关系。Among them, the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence, and the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence.
换句话说,M个模拟波束填充至N个模拟波束维度的输入矩阵时,按照一定的规则顺序填充,因此 M个模拟波束在N个模拟波束维度的输入矩阵中具有对应关系,相应的,M个波束对应的第一特征和第二特征与N个波束维度的第一特征和第二特征也具有对应关系。In other words, when M simulated beams are filled into an input matrix of N simulated beam dimensions, they are filled in a certain regular order, so The M simulated beams have a corresponding relationship in the input matrix of N simulated beam dimensions. Correspondingly, the first features and the second features corresponding to the M beams also have a corresponding relationship with the first features and the second features of the N beam dimensions.
一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征和所述O个第二特征包括特征主分量和特征补充分量,其中,特征主分量用于完成所述信道信息的重构,特征补充分量用于对信道信息的精度进行补充。In one possible implementation, the N first features and the O second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component, wherein the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information, and the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information.
其中,针对一个第一特征或第二特征的特征补充分量可以包括多个,不同反馈个数的特征补充分量指示不同的反馈精度。Therein, the feature supplement component for a first feature or a second feature may include multiple feature supplement components, and feature supplement components with different feedback numbers indicate different feedback accuracies.
一种可能的实现方式中,M个第一特征中的每一个第一特征包括特征主分量,M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征包括特征补充分量,P个第二特征中的每一个第二特征包括特征主分量,P个第二特征中的部分或全部第二特征包括特征补充分量。In one possible implementation, each of the M first features includes a feature principal component, some or all of the M first features include feature supplementary components, each of the P second features includes a feature principal component, and some or all of the P second features include feature supplementary components.
可以理解,反馈的M个信道信息对应的精度可以都为高精度,即反馈该M个信道信息对应的第一特征的主分量和补充分量,以及第二特征的主分量和补充分量,也可以部分为高精度,即反馈部分信道信息对应的第一特征的主分量和补充分量,以及第二特征的主分量和补充分量,另一部分信道信息只反馈对应的第一特征的主分量,以及第二特征的主分量,本申请对此不作限定。It can be understood that the accuracies corresponding to the M channel information fed back can all be high precision, that is, the main component and supplementary component of the first feature and the main component and supplementary component of the second feature corresponding to the M channel information are fed back, or part of it can be high precision, that is, the main component and supplementary component of the first feature and the main component and supplementary component of the second feature corresponding to part of the channel information are fed back, and the other part of the channel information only feeds back the corresponding main component of the first feature and the main component of the second feature. The present application does not limit this.
进一步的,高精度反馈也可以针对不同的信道信息反馈不同个数的补充分量,实现不同精度级别的反馈。Furthermore, high-precision feedback can also feed back different numbers of supplementary components for different channel information to achieve feedback at different precision levels.
示例性的,针对同一个信道信息,反馈的补充分量越多,精度越高。Exemplarily, for the same channel information, the more supplementary components fed back, the higher the accuracy.
需要说明的是,不同的信道信息反馈的精度级别可以相同,也可以不同,本申请不作限定。It should be noted that the accuracy levels of different channel information feedback may be the same or different, and this application does not limit this.
例如,在图10中,每个特征对应的反馈量由特征的主分量以及Q个特征的补充分量组成(Q≥1),以支持Q+1个精度等级的反馈。其中主分量可独立完成该部分信道信息的重构,补充分量作为该部分信道信息的高精度补充。For example, in Figure 10, the feedback amount corresponding to each feature is composed of the main component of the feature and the supplementary components of Q features (Q ≥ 1) to support feedback of Q+1 accuracy levels. The main component can independently complete the reconstruction of the part of the channel information, and the supplementary component serves as a high-precision supplement to the part of the channel information.
应理解,若终端支持高精度上报时,可同时反馈特征的主分量以及q个补充分量(Q≥q≥1);若终端仅支持低精度上报时,可仅反馈特征的主分量完成该部分信道信息的重构。该反馈量设计可支持终端以不同的精度对不同的波束特征进行上报。It should be understood that if the terminal supports high-precision reporting, the main component of the feature and q supplementary components (Q≥q≥1) can be fed back at the same time; if the terminal only supports low-precision reporting, only the main component of the feature can be fed back to complete the reconstruction of the channel information. This feedback amount design can support the terminal to report different beam features with different accuracies.
一种实现方式中,N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的特征主分量与M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的特征主分量具有对应关系;N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的补充分量与M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的补充分量具有对应关系;O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量具有对应关系,所述O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量具有对应关系。In one implementation, the characteristic principal component of each of the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the M first features; the supplementary component of each of the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each of the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each of the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each of the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each of the P second features.
其中,N个第一特征在第一序列中的位置与M个第一特征在第二序列中的位置具有对应关系,O个第二特征在第一序列中的位置与P个第二特征在第二序列中的位置具有对应关系。相应的,针对具有对应关系的第一序列中的特征(第一特征和第二特征)和第二序列中的特征(第一特征和第二特征),各自包括的特征主分量和特征补充分量也具有对应关系。Among them, the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence, and the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence. Accordingly, for the features in the first sequence (the first feature and the second feature) and the features in the second sequence (the first feature and the second feature) that have a corresponding relationship, the feature principal components and feature supplementary components included in each also have a corresponding relationship.
本申请中,M个信道信息对应的精度级别可以根据网络设备确定,也可以由终端设备确定。In the present application, the accuracy level corresponding to the M channel information can be determined by the network device or by the terminal device.
示例性的,网络设备可以根据L个信道信息的优先级来确定对应M个信道信息的精度类别。Exemplarily, the network device may determine the accuracy categories corresponding to the M channel information according to the priorities of the L channel information.
示例性的,终端设备可以根据L个信道信息的测量结果和/或L个信道信息的优先级信息确定对应M个信道信息的精度类别。Exemplarily, the terminal device may determine the accuracy categories corresponding to the M channel information based on the measurement results of the L channel information and/or the priority information of the L channel information.
应理解,当编码器对M个模拟波束的不同特征进行不同精度的上报时,终端可优先选择对M模拟波束的独有特征主分量以及公共特征主分量进行上报,保障解码器可完成M模拟波束完整信道信息的重构;然后,编码器可基于模拟波束的不同优先级,来对模拟波束的补充分量进行上报,达到更高精度下的反馈。It should be understood that when the encoder reports different characteristics of M simulated beams with different accuracies, the terminal can give priority to reporting the unique characteristic principal components and common characteristic principal components of the M simulated beams to ensure that the decoder can complete the reconstruction of the complete channel information of the M simulated beams; then, the encoder can report the supplementary components of the simulated beams based on the different priorities of the simulated beams to achieve feedback with higher accuracy.
730,编码器向解码器发送所述第二序列。730. The encoder sends the second sequence to the decoder.
相应的,解码器接收第二序列。Accordingly, the decoder receives the second sequence.
740,解码器根据第二序列确定第一序列。At 740, the decoder determines the first sequence according to the second sequence.
应理解,编码器和解码器的输入和输出均为固定N波束维度的矩阵,即,在解码器的输入端,需要将M个信道信息的联合反馈量还原为对应N个信道信息的联合反馈量。It should be understood that the input and output of the encoder and decoder are matrices of fixed N beam dimensions, that is, at the input of the decoder, the joint feedback amount of M channel information needs to be restored to the joint feedback amount corresponding to N channel information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,确定M个信道信息在解码器输入端的堆叠位置与N个信道信息在解码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系,根据该对应关系确定对应N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量。In a possible implementation, a correspondence between stacking positions of M channel information at a decoder input and stacking positions of N channel information at a decoder input is determined, and X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information are determined according to the correspondence.
例如,根据编码器输入端N波束维度下的输入矩阵对应的位置与M个模拟波束预编码矩阵填充至N 波束输入矩阵的对应波束位置关系,确定出解码器输入端M个信道信息的堆叠位置与N个信道信息的堆叠位置的对应关系,将M个模拟波束编码矩阵填充至N波束输入矩阵的位置,对未反馈部分对应的波束位置进行固定量填充,从而可以得到X个的全反馈量。For example, according to the position corresponding to the input matrix under the N beam dimension of the encoder input end and the M simulated beam precoding matrices filled to N The corresponding beam position relationship of the beam input matrix is determined, and the corresponding relationship between the stacking position of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking position of the N channel information is determined. The M analog beam coding matrices are filled to the position of the N beam input matrix, and the beam position corresponding to the non-feedback part is filled with a fixed amount, so that the full feedback amount of X can be obtained.
一种可能的实现方式中,根据N个信道信息在编码器输入端的堆叠位置与M个信道信息在编码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系确定N个第一特征和O个第二特征,根据M个第一特征和P个第二特征确定对应N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量。In one possible implementation, N first features and O second features are determined based on the correspondence between the stacking positions of N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of M channel information at the encoder input end, and X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information are determined based on the M first features and the P second features.
其中,N个第一特征在第一序列中的位置与M个第一特征在第二序列中的位置具有对应关系,O个第二特征在第一序列中的位置与P个第二特征在第二序列中的位置具有对应关系。Among them, the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence, and the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence.
换句话说,M个模拟波束填充至N个模拟波束维度的输入矩阵时,按照一定的规则顺序填充,因此M个模拟波束在N个模拟波束维度的输入矩阵中具有对应关系,相应的,M个波束对应的第一特征和第二特征与N个波束维度的第一特征和第二特征也具有对应关系。In other words, when M simulated beams are filled into an input matrix of N simulated beam dimensions, they are filled in a certain regular order. Therefore, the M simulated beams have a corresponding relationship in the input matrix of N simulated beam dimensions. Correspondingly, the first features and the second features corresponding to the M beams also have a corresponding relationship with the first features and the second features of the N beam dimensions.
一种可能的实现方式中,M个第一特征和P个第二特征包括特征主分量和特征补充分量,其中,特征主分量用于完成所述信道信息的重构,特征补充分量用于对信道信息的精度进行补充。In a possible implementation, the M first features and the P second features include a feature principal component and a feature supplement component, wherein the feature principal component is used to complete the reconstruction of the channel information, and the feature supplement component is used to supplement the accuracy of the channel information.
其中,针对一个第一特征或第二特征的特征补充分量可以包括多个,不同反馈个数的特征补充分量指示不同的反馈精度。Therein, the feature supplement component for a first feature or a second feature may include multiple feature supplement components, and feature supplement components with different feedback numbers indicate different feedback accuracies.
一种可能的实现方式中,N个第一特征中的每一个第一特征包括特征主分量,所述N个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征包括特征补充分量,O个第二特征中的每一个第二特征包括所述特征主分量,所述O个第二特征中的部分或全部第二特征包括所述特征补充分量。In one possible implementation, each of the N first features includes a feature principal component, some or all of the N first features include a feature supplementary component, each of the O second features includes the feature principal component, and some or all of the O second features include the feature supplementary component.
可以理解,实际反馈的M个信道信息对应的精度可以都为高精度,即反馈该M个信道信息对应的第一特征的主分量和补充分量,以及第二特征的主分量和补充分量,也可以部分为高精度,即反馈部分信道信息对应的第一特征的主分量和补充分量,以及第二特征的主分量和补充分量,另一部分信道信息只反馈对应的第一特征的主分量,以及第二特征的主分量,本申请对此不作限定。It can be understood that the accuracies corresponding to the M channel information actually fed back can all be high-precision, that is, the main component and supplementary component of the first feature and the main component and supplementary component of the second feature corresponding to the M channel information are fed back, or part of it can be high-precision, that is, the main component and supplementary component of the first feature and the main component and supplementary component of the second feature corresponding to part of the channel information are fed back, and the other part of the channel information only feeds back the corresponding main component of the first feature and the main component of the second feature. The present application does not limit this.
一种实现中,N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的特征主分量与M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的特征主分量具有对应关系;N个第一特征中的每个第一特征的补充分量与M个第一特征中的部分或全部第一特征的补充分量具有对应关系;所述O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征主分量具有对应关系,所述O个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量与所述P个第二特征中每一个第二特征的特征补充分量具有对应关系。In one implementation, the characteristic principal component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the supplementary component of each first feature among the N first features has a corresponding relationship with the supplementary components of some or all of the first features among the M first features; the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic principal component of each second feature among the P second features, and the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the O second features has a corresponding relationship with the characteristic supplementary component of each second feature among the P second features.
其中,N个第一特征在第一序列中的位置与M个第一特征在第二序列中的位置具有对应关系,O个第二特征在第一序列中的位置与P个第二特征在第二序列中的位置具有对应关系。相应的,针对具有对应关系的第一序列中的特征(第一特征和第二特征)和第二序列中的特征(第一特征和第二特征),各自包括的特征主分量和特征补充分量也具有对应关系。Among them, the positions of the N first features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the M first features in the second sequence, and the positions of the O second features in the first sequence correspond to the positions of the P second features in the second sequence. Accordingly, for the features in the first sequence (the first feature and the second feature) and the features in the second sequence (the first feature and the second feature) that have a corresponding relationship, the feature principal components and feature supplementary components included in each also have a corresponding relationship.
本申请中,上报的M个信道信息对应的精度级别可以相同,也可以不同,本申请对此不作限定。In the present application, the accuracy levels corresponding to the reported M channel information may be the same or different, and the present application does not limit this.
本申请中,上报的M个信道信息对应的精度级别可以是网络设备确定的,也可以是终端设备确定的。In the present application, the accuracy level corresponding to the reported M channel information may be determined by a network device or a terminal device.
精度级别的上报确定可参考编码器端的详细说明,不再赘述。For the reporting and determination of the accuracy level, please refer to the detailed description of the encoder side, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,当编码器对M个模拟波束的不同特征进行不同精度的上报时,终端可优先对M模拟波束的独有特征主分量以及公共特征主分量进行上报,解码器根据上报的M个模拟波束的独有特征主分量和公共特征主分量完成M模拟波束完整信道信息的重构;然后,编码器基于模拟波束的不同优先级,来对模拟波束的补充分量进行上报,解码器可以进一步根据M个模拟波束对应的补充分量来重构对应信道信息,实现更高精度的信道信息的重构。It should be understood that when the encoder reports different characteristics of M simulated beams with different accuracies, the terminal can give priority to reporting the unique characteristic principal components and common characteristic principal components of the M simulated beams, and the decoder completes the reconstruction of the complete channel information of the M simulated beams based on the reported unique characteristic principal components and common characteristic principal components of the M simulated beams; then, the encoder reports the supplementary components of the simulated beams based on the different priorities of the simulated beams, and the decoder can further reconstruct the corresponding channel information based on the supplementary components corresponding to the M simulated beams, thereby achieving higher-precision reconstruction of the channel information.
750,解码器对第一序列进行重构得到M个信道信息。At 750, the decoder reconstructs the first sequence to obtain M channel information.
将第一序列对应的N个模拟波束维度的矩阵输入至解码器,解码器对该第一序列进行重构得到N个模拟波束维度下的输出矩阵。The matrix of N simulated beam dimensions corresponding to the first sequence is input to the decoder, and the decoder reconstructs the first sequence to obtain an output matrix of N simulated beam dimensions.
进一步的,解码器根据M个信道信息在解码器输入端的堆叠位置与N个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系,从输出矩阵中选取M个信道信息对应的波束位置的信息,从而得到M个信道信息的输出矩阵。Furthermore, the decoder selects information of beam positions corresponding to the M channel information from the output matrix according to the correspondence between the stacking positions of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking positions of the N channel information at the decoder input end, thereby obtaining an output matrix of the M channel information.
换句话说,解码器对N个模拟波束维度的输入矩阵进行重构,得到的也是对应N个模拟波束维度的输出矩阵,N个模拟波束维度的输入矩阵中包括了M个模拟波束的输入矩阵和N-M个固定量,因此想到得到M个模拟波束的输出矩阵,那么就需要根据M个信道信息在解码器输入端的堆叠位置与N个信道信 息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系截取出M个信道信息,也可以说根据该对应关系将固定量的信道信息剔除,从而得到M个模拟波束对应的信道信息。In other words, the decoder reconstructs the input matrix of N analog beam dimensions and obtains the output matrix corresponding to N analog beam dimensions. The input matrix of N analog beam dimensions includes the input matrix of M analog beams and NM fixed quantities. Therefore, in order to obtain the output matrix of M analog beams, it is necessary to stack the M channel information at the decoder input end according to the stacking position of the M channel information and the N channel information. The M channel information is intercepted according to the corresponding relationship of the stacking position of the information at the decoder input end. It can also be said that a fixed amount of channel information is eliminated according to the corresponding relationship, so as to obtain the channel information corresponding to the M simulated beams.
根据该技术方案,利用AI模型可以将固定维度的N个模拟波束信道信息联合压缩并反馈给解码器,解码器利用AI模型重构N个模拟波束信道信息,其中,编码器可以通过该固定维度的N个模拟波束对应的输入矩阵来承载M个信道信息,从而实现部分信道信息的压缩和反馈,避免了多个AI模型的存储/切换开销,降低了实现的复杂度;另外,定义了部分反馈的优先级,保证了多波束上报的高效性和可靠性;进一步的,针对压缩反馈的M个信道信息,可以通过每个信道信息对应的特征主分量和特征补充分量来反馈对应信道信息的精度,从而实现不同模拟波束可采用不同精度上报,增加了反馈机制的灵活度。According to the technical solution, the AI model can be used to jointly compress the channel information of N simulated beams of fixed dimension and feed it back to the decoder. The decoder uses the AI model to reconstruct the channel information of N simulated beams, wherein the encoder can carry M channel information through the input matrix corresponding to the N simulated beams of fixed dimension, thereby realizing the compression and feedback of partial channel information, avoiding the storage/switching overhead of multiple AI models and reducing the complexity of implementation; in addition, the priority of partial feedback is defined to ensure the efficiency and reliability of multi-beam reporting; further, for the M channel information of compressed feedback, the accuracy of the corresponding channel information can be fed back through the characteristic principal component and characteristic supplementary component corresponding to each channel information, thereby realizing that different simulated beams can be reported with different accuracies, increasing the flexibility of the feedback mechanism.
以下结合多波束信道信息测量上报来对本申请提出的反馈方法进行详细说明。The feedback method proposed in this application is described in detail below in conjunction with multi-beam channel information measurement reporting.
图11是本申请实施例提供的一种用于反馈信道状态的方法的示意性流程图。为便于描述,方法1100以网络设备和终端设备作为交互的执行主体为例进行示例性说明。编码器和解码器可以分别部署于终端设备和网络设备。其中,该编码器或解码器也可以是AI节点或AI节点的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路),不予限定。图11所示的方法1100可以包括如下步骤。Figure 11 is a schematic flow chart of a method for feeding back channel status provided by an embodiment of the present application. For ease of description, method 1100 is exemplarily illustrated by taking a network device and a terminal device as the execution subject of the interaction. The encoder and the decoder can be deployed on the terminal device and the network device, respectively. Among them, the encoder or decoder can also be an AI node or a component of an AI node (such as a chip or circuit), without limitation. The method 1100 shown in Figure 11 may include the following steps.
1110、网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息。1110. The network device sends configuration information to the terminal device.
该配置信息可以包括参考信号配置信息和信道信息上报配置信息。The configuration information may include reference signal configuration information and channel information reporting configuration information.
其中,参考信号配置信息,可以包括参考信号端口分组相关的信息和参考信号资源分组相关的信息。The reference signal configuration information may include information related to reference signal port grouping and information related to reference signal resource grouping.
参考信号端口分组相关的信息,例如,参考信号端口分组的数量K,每个分组中的端口数量分别为PCSI-RS,k,k=0,1,...,K-1。示例性的,每个端口分组中的端口数量完全相同,例如每个端口分组中的端口数量为PCSI-RS。Information related to reference signal port grouping, for example, the number of reference signal port groups K, the number of ports in each group is PCSI-RS,k , k=0,1,...,K-1. Exemplarily, the number of ports in each port group is exactly the same, for example, the number of ports in each port group is PCSI-RS .
参考信号资源分组相关的信息,例如,参考信号资源分组的数量K,每个分组中的参考信号资源和/或者端口数量分别为PCSI-RS,k,k=0,1,...,K-1,示例性的,每个资源分组中总的端口数量完全相同,例如每个资源分组中总的端口数量为PCSI-RS。Information related to reference signal resource grouping, for example, the number of reference signal resource groups K, the number of reference signal resources and/or ports in each group is PCSI-RS, k , k = 0, 1, ..., K-1, exemplarily, the total number of ports in each resource group is exactly the same, for example, the total number of ports in each resource group is PCSI-RS .
示例性的,参考信号资源分组可以为CSI-RS端口组#1,CSI-RS端口组#2,……,CSI-RS端口组#K。Exemplarily, the reference signal resource grouping may be CSI-RS port group #1, CSI-RS port group #2, ..., CSI-RS port group #K.
本实施例中,以参考信号端口组为例描述参考信号,类似的,该方案也适用于参考信号资源分组的场景。本申请对此不作限定。In this embodiment, the reference signal port group is used as an example to describe the reference signal. Similarly, this solution is also applicable to the scenario of reference signal resource grouping. This application does not limit this.
其中,信道信息上报配置信息可以包括上报、测量的内容和上报、测量的数量。The channel information reporting configuration information may include the content of reporting and measurement and the number of reporting and measurement.
示例性的,上报、测量的数量可以是测量的信道信息数量L,L小于或者等于N。Exemplarily, the number of reports and measurements may be the number L of measured channel information, where L is less than or equal to N.
应注意,该实施例中,以N个模拟波束数作为联合反馈的最大模拟波束个数,以X个联合开销量作为联合反馈的最大反馈量,最大模拟波束个数和最大联合反馈量的确定可以参考方法700中的步骤710,本申请对此不作限定。It should be noted that in this embodiment, N simulated beams are used as the maximum number of simulated beams for joint feedback, and X joint overhead is used as the maximum feedback amount for joint feedback. The determination of the maximum number of simulated beams and the maximum joint feedback amount can refer to step 710 in method 700, and this application does not limit this.
一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定需要上报的模拟波束数M与反馈开销Y。In a possible implementation, the network device determines the number of simulated beams M and the feedback overhead Y that need to be reported.
示例性的,网络设备根据各模拟波束联合反馈的优先级确定上报的模拟波束数M与反馈开销Y,该情况下,L可以等于M,网络设备可以向终端设备发送测量的M个模拟波束与N个模拟波束对应关系以及反馈开销Y。Exemplarily, the network device determines the reported number of simulated beams M and the feedback overhead Y based on the priority of the joint feedback of each simulated beam. In this case, L can be equal to M, and the network device can send the measured correspondence between M simulated beams and N simulated beams and the feedback overhead Y to the terminal device.
另一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备确定上报的模拟波束数M与反馈开销Y。In another possible implementation, the terminal device determines the number of simulated beams M and the feedback overhead Y to be reported.
示例性的,终端设备测量L个信道信息,根据联合反馈的优先级(例如:基于CQI/RSRP测量)确定M个上报的模拟波束与反馈开销Y。该情况下,L小于等于最大模拟波束数N,M小于等于L,终端设备可以向网络设备上报自己确定的M个模拟波束与N个模拟波束的对应关系,以及其反馈开销Y。Exemplarily, the terminal device measures L channel information and determines M reported simulated beams and feedback overhead Y according to the priority of joint feedback (for example, based on CQI/RSRP measurement). In this case, L is less than or equal to the maximum number of simulated beams N, and M is less than or equal to L. The terminal device can report the correspondence between the M simulated beams and the N simulated beams determined by itself, as well as its feedback overhead Y to the network device.
配置信息还可以包括CSI-RS发送的方式,和/或者CSI-RS端口组与多模拟波束信道信息之间的关系(详细内容参看下文1120)。The configuration information may also include a CSI-RS transmission method and/or a relationship between a CSI-RS port group and multi-analog beam channel information (see 1120 below for details).
该配置信息还可以包括其他内容,本申请对此不作限定。The configuration information may also include other content, which is not limited in this application.
1120、网络设备向终端设备发送参考信号。1120. The network device sends a reference signal to the terminal device.
网络设备通过参考信号配置信息配置的资源向终端设备发送参考信号。The network device sends a reference signal to the terminal device through the resources configured by the reference signal configuration information.
以下实施例中,参考信号以CSI-RS为例,本申请对此不作限定。In the following embodiments, the reference signal takes CSI-RS as an example, which is not limited in the present application.
在资源配置信息所配置的资源上发送CSI-RS。The CSI-RS is sent on the resources configured by the resource configuration information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,不同的CSI-RS端口组采取时分的方法发送,即在不同的时域资源(例如,时隙或OFDM符号)上发送不同的CSI-RS端口组。In a possible implementation, different CSI-RS port groups are sent in a time division manner, that is, different CSI-RS port groups are sent on different time domain resources (eg, time slots or OFDM symbols).
采用时分的方式发送CSI-RS端口组,可以方便在HBF架构下基于不同的模拟波束发送多个参考信 号,实现信道信息的测量。The CSI-RS port group is sent in a time-division manner, which can facilitate the sending of multiple reference signals based on different simulated beams under the HBF architecture. number to realize the measurement of channel information.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,不同的CSI-RS端口组可以采用频分的方式发送,即在不同的频域资源(例如,分量载波、资源块、或者不同的子载波)上发送不同的CSI-RS端口组。例如,基于第一模拟波束发送CSI-RS端口组#1;基于第二模拟波束发送CSI-RS端口组#2。In another possible implementation, different CSI-RS port groups may be sent in a frequency division manner, that is, different CSI-RS port groups are sent on different frequency domain resources (e.g., component carriers, resource blocks, or different subcarriers). For example, CSI-RS port group #1 is sent based on the first analog beam; and CSI-RS port group #2 is sent based on the second analog beam.
采用频分的方式发送CSI-RS端口组,可以使得网络设备快速扫描信道信息。The CSI-RS port group is sent in a frequency division manner, so that the network device can quickly scan the channel information.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,不同的CSI-RS端口组可以采用码分的方式发送,例如,基于第一模拟波束发送CSI-RS端口组#1;CSI-RS端口组#2基于与第一模拟波束正交的第二模拟波束发送。In another possible implementation, different CSI-RS port groups may be sent in a code division manner, for example, CSI-RS port group #1 is sent based on a first analog beam; and CSI-RS port group #2 is sent based on a second analog beam orthogonal to the first analog beam.
采用码分的方式发送CSI-RS端口组,可以用于HBF架构下网络设备快速扫描信道信息。The CSI-RS port group is sent in a code division manner, which can be used for network devices in the HBF architecture to quickly scan channel information.
需要说明的是,信道信息的反馈有时效性的需求,联合反馈多个信道信息,进行压缩的多个信道信息都要满足时效性,从而保障联合压缩的性能。It should be noted that there is a timeliness requirement for the feedback of channel information. When multiple channel information is fed back jointly, the multiple channel information to be compressed must meet the timeliness requirement, thereby ensuring the performance of joint compression.
一种可能的实现方式中,可以限定多个CSI-RS端口组的时频范围。In a possible implementation manner, the time-frequency ranges of multiple CSI-RS port groups may be limited.
例如,网络设备分别配置CSI-RS端口组#1~K,多个端口组需限制在相同频域(但仍可位于相同资源块的不同资源单元),占据带宽相同;并且,多个端口组位于同一时隙或相邻时隙,多个CSI-RS端口组的时隙间隔不超过t。For example, the network equipment configures CSI-RS port groups #1 to K respectively, and multiple port groups need to be limited to the same frequency domain (but can still be located in different resource units of the same resource block) and occupy the same bandwidth; and multiple port groups are located in the same time slot or adjacent time slots, and the time slot interval of multiple CSI-RS port groups does not exceed t.
1130、终端设备测量L个模拟波束信道信息。1130. The terminal device measures information of L simulated beam channels.
终端设备接收K个CSI-RS端口组,并根据CSI-RS和信道信息上报配置信息,获取L个模拟波束下的预编码矩阵。The terminal device receives K CSI-RS port groups, reports configuration information based on CSI-RS and channel information, and obtains the precoding matrix under L simulated beams.
具体的,下面以预编码矩阵作为信道信息的示例,可以分为以下两种情况:Specifically, the following takes the precoding matrix as an example of channel information, which can be divided into the following two cases:
情况1:L等于K。即K个端口组,用于确定L=K组信道系数。Case 1: L is equal to K. That is, K port groups are used to determine L=K groups of channel coefficients.
例如,网络设备向终端配置L个端口组,每个端口组对应一个模拟波束。该K个端口组用于测量网络设备(比如基站)阵列A1,A2,D1,D2,(水平垂直阵子数、数字端口数)下,L个不同模拟波束(模拟权值分别为{w1,w2,w3,...})下的信道系数{H1,H2,H3,...},终端设备再通过svd分解,计算得到L个不同模拟波束下的预编码矩阵{v1,v2,v3,...}。For example, the network device configures L port groups to the terminal, and each port group corresponds to an analog beam. The K port groups are used to measure the channel coefficients {H 1 ,H 2 ,H 3 , ... } under L different analog beams (analog weights are {w 1 ,w 2 ,w 3 ,...}) under the network device (such as base station) arrays A 1 ,A 2 ,D 1 ,D 2 (horizontal and vertical array numbers, digital port numbers), and the terminal device then calculates the precoding matrices {v 1 , v 2 ,v 3 ,...} under the L different analog beams through SVD decomposition.
情况2:L大于K。即K个端口组,用于确定L组信道系数。Case 2: L is greater than K. That is, K port groups are used to determine L groups of channel coefficients.
例如,K个端口组用于获取K个端口组的信道系数(或者信道响应),分别记为h1,h2,h3,...,hk。基于K个端口组的信道信息,以及信道组合系数可以得到L个模拟波束下的信道系数终端设备再通过svd分解,计算得到L个不同模拟波束下的预编码矩阵{v1,v2,v3,...}。For example, K port groups are used to obtain channel coefficients (or channel responses) of the K port groups, which are recorded as h 1 , h 2 , h 3 , ..., h k . Based on the channel information of the K port groups and the channel combination coefficients The channel coefficients under L simulated beams can be obtained The terminal device then calculates the precoding matrices {v 1 ,v 2 ,v 3 ,...} under L different simulated beams through SVD decomposition.
也即,L个信道信息为L个预编码矩阵时,该L个信道信息是根据L个模拟波束的信道系数分解得到的,或者,L个信道信息是根据K个端口组的信道信息和信道组合系数分解得到的。That is, when the L channel information are L precoding matrices, the L channel information are decomposed according to the channel coefficients of the L analog beams, or the L channel information are decomposed according to the channel information of the K port groups and the channel combination coefficients.
本申请中,终端设备可以对L个信道信息进行测量,并对其中的M个信道信息进行压缩反馈。In the present application, the terminal device can measure L channel information and compress and feedback M of the channel information.
需要说明的是,情况2对于HBF架构(或者模拟波束成型架构),可以通过更少的参考信号获取更多的信道信息。例如,基站可以采取K组正交的模拟权值{W1,W2,W3,...},通过不同的天线组同时发送K个CSI-RS端口组,从而可以获得K个模拟端口对应的信道信息;而在终端设备,通过模拟端口信道之间的加权(即,可以等效为一个模拟波束),从而可以获得L>K个模拟波束的信道信息。通过这种方式,终端设备测量到加密的波束信道信息。It should be noted that, for the HBF architecture (or analog beamforming architecture), case 2 can obtain more channel information with fewer reference signals. For example, the base station can use K groups of orthogonal analog weights {W 1 ,W 2 ,W 3 ,...}, and send K CSI-RS port groups simultaneously through different antenna groups, so as to obtain the channel information corresponding to the K analog ports; and in the terminal device, by weighting the analog port channels (i.e., It can be equivalent to a simulated beam), so that the channel information of L>K simulated beams can be obtained. In this way, the terminal device measures the encrypted beam channel information.
1140、终端设备对M个模拟波束的信道信息进行联合压缩,得到M个模拟波束的预编码矩阵。1140. The terminal device jointly compresses the channel information of the M analog beams to obtain a precoding matrix of the M analog beams.
具体的,终端设备可以从测量的L个模拟波束信道信息中确定出M个模拟波束的信道信息,也即,选择要上报的M个模拟波束的信道信息,并通过svd计算M个模拟波束的预编码矩阵。Specifically, the terminal device can determine the channel information of M simulated beams from the measured channel information of L simulated beams, that is, select the channel information of M simulated beams to be reported, and calculate the precoding matrix of the M simulated beams through SVD.
从L个模拟波束信道信息确定出M个模拟波束的信道信息,可以通过以下示例性方式。The channel information of the M simulated beams may be determined from the channel information of the L simulated beams in the following exemplary manner.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上报的M个模拟波束及其反馈开销Y可以为网络设备基于L个模拟波束的优先级确定的。该情况下,网络设备可以向终端设备指示该M个信道信息与N个信道信息的对应关系。In a possible implementation, the reported M analog beams and their feedback overhead Y may be determined by the network device based on the priorities of the L analog beams. In this case, the network device may indicate the correspondence between the M channel information and the N channel information to the terminal device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备上报可以根据基于网络设备配置的L个模拟波束对应的优先级以及L个模拟波束的测量结果确定M个信道信息以及对应的反馈开销Y。In a possible implementation, the terminal device report can determine M channel information and corresponding feedback overhead Y based on the priorities corresponding to L simulated beams configured based on the network device and the measurement results of the L simulated beams.
该情况下,终端设备可以向网络设备指示该M个信道信息与N个信道信息的对应关系。In this case, the terminal device may indicate the correspondence between the M channel information and the N channel information to the network device.
其中,L个信道信息的测量结果包括但不限于CQI、RSRP测量等。 The measurement results of the L channel information include but are not limited to CQI, RSRP measurement, etc.
终端设备对M个模拟波束进行联合压缩得到M个模拟波束的信道信息。The terminal device jointly compresses the M analog beams to obtain channel information of the M analog beams.
图12示出了一种压缩反馈流程的示意图。如图12所示,在编码器的输入端需要将M个模拟波束的预编码矩阵填充至编码器N个波束维度的输入矩阵的对应波束位置,当M小于N时,其余未填充的位置可以输入固定量来进行填充,从而得到N个模拟波束维度下的输入矩阵,将该输入矩阵输入编码器进行联合压缩,得到X比特开销的全反馈量。Figure 12 shows a schematic diagram of a compression feedback process. As shown in Figure 12, at the input end of the encoder, the precoding matrix of the M simulated beams needs to be filled into the corresponding beam position of the input matrix of the N beam dimensions of the encoder. When M is less than N, the remaining unfilled positions can be filled with a fixed amount to obtain the input matrix of the N simulated beam dimensions, and the input matrix is input into the encoder for joint compression to obtain the full feedback amount of X bits of overhead.
其中,在编码器的输入端,根据定义的N个模拟波束信道信息的堆叠排列方式填充波束位置,例如,根据图8示出的堆叠方式排列N个模拟波束。At the input end of the encoder, the beam positions are filled according to the stacking arrangement of the defined N simulated beam channel information, for example, the N simulated beams are arranged in the stacking manner as shown in FIG. 8 .
1150、终端设备发送M个信道信息的联合反馈量。1150. The terminal device sends a joint feedback amount of M channel information.
编码器输出端输出N个模拟波束维度下的输出矩阵以及X个反馈量,终端设备根据编码器输入端的N个模拟波束与M个模拟波束的堆叠位置的对应关系从该N个模拟波束维度下的输出矩阵截取M个模拟波束对应的Y个联合反馈量,并将M个模拟波束对应的矩阵反馈给解码器,从而可以进行部分上报。The encoder output end outputs an output matrix in N analog beam dimensions and X feedback quantities. The terminal device intercepts Y joint feedback quantities corresponding to M analog beams from the output matrix in N analog beam dimensions according to the correspondence between the stacking positions of the N analog beams and the M analog beams at the encoder input end, and feeds back the matrix corresponding to the M analog beams to the decoder, so that partial reporting can be performed.
可以理解的是,在M个信道信息及反馈开销Y为终端设备根据优先级信息及测量结果确定的情况下,终端设备还可以发送M个信道信息与N个信道信息的对应关系。It can be understood that, when the M channel information and the feedback overhead Y are determined by the terminal device according to the priority information and the measurement result, the terminal device can also send the correspondence between the M channel information and the N channel information.
1160、网络设备对M个模拟波束的信道信息进行联合重构得到M个信道信息。1160. The network device jointly reconstructs the channel information of the M simulated beams to obtain M channel information.
如图12所示,网络上报接收Y比特开销下的部分波束联合反馈量,并基于N个模拟波束与M个模拟波束的堆叠位置的对应关系,对未反馈部分的对应波束位置进行固定量填充,得到X比特开销下的全反馈量,并输入至解码器进行联合重构,得到N波束维度下的输出矩阵。As shown in Figure 12, the network reports the partial beam joint feedback amount received under the Y-bit overhead, and based on the corresponding relationship between the stacking positions of the N analog beams and the M analog beams, fills the corresponding beam positions of the non-feedback part with a fixed amount to obtain the full feedback amount under the X-bit overhead, and inputs it to the decoder for joint reconstruction to obtain the output matrix under the N-beam dimension.
进一步的,网络设备根据N个模拟波束与M个模拟波束的堆叠位置的对应关系,从输出矩阵中选取对应波束位置的信息得到上报的M个模拟波束的预编码矩阵。Furthermore, the network device selects information of corresponding beam positions from the output matrix according to the correspondence between the stacking positions of the N simulated beams and the M simulated beams to obtain the precoding matrix of the reported M simulated beams.
需要说明的是,在步骤S1150中,终端设备还可以判断M个模拟波束对应的反馈精度,M个模拟波束对应的反馈开销表示为Z={Z1,Z2,…,Zm},其中,Z包括m个对应于M个模拟波束的反馈开销,该m个反馈开销对应m个反馈精度。It should be noted that, in step S1150, the terminal device may also determine the feedback accuracies corresponding to the M simulated beams. The feedback overheads corresponding to the M simulated beams are expressed as Z = {Z 1 , Z 2 , ..., Z m }, where Z includes m feedback overheads corresponding to the M simulated beams, and the m feedback overheads correspond to m feedback accuracies.
可以理解的是,反馈精度为网络设备基于L个模拟波束的优先级信息配置给终端设备的,也可以是终端设备根据测量结果及优先级信息确定的。It can be understood that the feedback accuracy is configured by the network device to the terminal device based on the priority information of the L simulated beams, or it can be determined by the terminal device according to the measurement results and priority information.
终端设备得到X比特的联合反馈量后,基于反馈开销Z={Z1,Z2,…,Zm}以及不同精度特征与反馈量位置对应关系,从X比特的联合反馈量中确定出Z比特的部分反馈量,其中该Z比特的部分反馈量中可以包括m个低精度的反馈量,也可以包括m个高精度的反馈量,也可以是一部分低精度反馈,另一部分是高精度的反馈量,本申请对此不作限定。After obtaining the X-bit joint feedback amount, the terminal device determines a Z-bit partial feedback amount from the X-bit joint feedback amount based on the feedback overhead Z={Z 1 , Z 2 , …, Z m } and the corresponding relationship between different precision features and feedback amount positions, wherein the Z-bit partial feedback amount may include m low-precision feedback amounts, may also include m high-precision feedback amounts, or may be a part of low-precision feedback and the other part of high-precision feedback amounts, which is not limited in the present application.
也即,终端设备可以针对不同的模拟波束反馈不同的精度,达到灵活反馈的目的。That is, the terminal device can feed back different accuracies for different analog beams, thereby achieving the purpose of flexible feedback.
假设Z比特的部分反馈量包括m个低精度的反馈量,将该Z比特反馈量发送至解码器,在解码器的输入端,根据反馈开销Z={Z1,Z2,…,Zm}以及不同精度特征与反馈量位置对应关系,对低精度联合反馈量进行对应补充分量位置的固定量填充,得到X个全反馈量并输入至解码器进行联合重构,得到M模拟波束的低精度预编码矩阵。Assuming that the Z-bit partial feedback amount includes m low-precision feedback amounts, the Z-bit feedback amount is sent to the decoder. At the input end of the decoder, according to the feedback overhead Z={Z 1 , Z 2 , ..., Z m } and the corresponding relationship between different precision characteristics and feedback amount positions, the low-precision joint feedback amount is padded with a fixed amount at the corresponding supplementary component position to obtain X full feedback amounts and input them into the decoder for joint reconstruction to obtain a low-precision precoding matrix of M analog beams.
该技术方案中,根据部分反馈量与全反馈量的波束位置对应关系在编码器侧输入部分波束的信道信息,从而实现部分信道信息的压缩和反馈,避免了多个AI模型的存储/切换开销,降低了实现的复杂度;另外,定义了部分反馈的优先级,保证了多波束上报的高效性和可靠性;进一步的,针对压缩反馈的M个信道信息,可以通过每个信道信息对应的特征主分量和特征补充分量来反馈对应信道信息的精度,从而实现不同模拟波束可采用不同精度上报,增加了反馈机制的灵活度。In this technical solution, the channel information of the partial beam is input on the encoder side according to the correspondence between the beam positions of the partial feedback amount and the full feedback amount, thereby realizing compression and feedback of the partial channel information, avoiding the storage/switching overhead of multiple AI models and reducing the complexity of implementation; in addition, the priority of partial feedback is defined to ensure the efficiency and reliability of multi-beam reporting; further, for the M channel information of compressed feedback, the accuracy of the corresponding channel information can be fed back through the characteristic principal component and characteristic supplementary component corresponding to each channel information, thereby realizing that different simulation beams can be reported with different accuracies, increasing the flexibility of the feedback mechanism.
应理解,本申请实施例的其他可能的实现方式与上述方法700或方法1100类似,可参见方法700或方法1100中的描述,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that other possible implementation methods of the embodiments of the present application are similar to the above-mentioned method 700 or method 1100. Please refer to the description in method 700 or method 1100, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that the sequence numbers of the above processes do not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,各个网元,例如发射端设备或者接收端设备,为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。 The above mainly introduces the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application from the perspective of the interaction between various network elements. It can be understood that each network element, such as a transmitting end device or a receiving end device, includes a hardware structure and/or software module corresponding to the execution of each function in order to realize the above functions. Those skilled in the art should be aware that, in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed in this document, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to exceed the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对发射端设备或者接收端设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面以采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块为例进行说明。The embodiment of the present application can divide the functional modules of the transmitting end device or the receiving end device according to the above method example. For example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical functional division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation. The following is an example of dividing each functional module corresponding to each function.
以上,结合图7至图12详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法。以下,结合图13至图14详细说明本申请实施例提供的装置。应理解,装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应,因此,未详细描述的内容可以参见上文方法实施例,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。The method provided by the embodiment of the present application is described in detail above in conjunction with Figures 7 to 12. The device provided by the embodiment of the present application is described in detail below in conjunction with Figures 13 to 14. It should be understood that the description of the device embodiment corresponds to the description of the method embodiment. Therefore, the content not described in detail can be referred to the method embodiment above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
图13是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图。FIG13 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
该装置1300包括收发单元1310和处理单元1320,其中,收发单元1310可以用于实现相应的通信功能,处理单元1320可以用于进行数据处理。The device 1300 includes a transceiver unit 1310 and a processing unit 1320, wherein the transceiver unit 1310 can be used to implement corresponding communication functions, and the processing unit 1320 can be used to perform data processing.
可选地,收发单元1310还可以称为通信接口或通信单元,包括发送单元和/或接收单元。该收发单元1310可以是收发器(包括发射器和/或接收器)、输入/输出接口(包括输入和/或输出接口)、管脚或电路等。该收发单元1310可以用于执行上述方法实施例中发送和/或接收的步骤。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1310 may also be referred to as a communication interface or a communication unit, including a sending unit and/or a receiving unit. The transceiver unit 1310 may be a transceiver (including a transmitter and/or a receiver), an input/output interface (including an input and/or output interface), a pin or a circuit, etc. The transceiver unit 1310 may be used to perform the steps of sending and/or receiving in the above method embodiment.
可选地,该处理单元1320可以是处理器(可以包括一个多个)、具有处理器功能的处理电路等,可以用于执行上述方法实施例中除发送接收外的其它步骤。Optionally, the processing unit 1320 may be a processor (may include one or more), a processing circuit with a processor function, etc., and may be used to execute other steps except sending and receiving in the above method embodiment.
可选地,该装置1300还包括存储单元,该存储单元可以是存储器、内部存储单元(例如,寄存器、缓存等)、外部的存储单元(例如,只读存储器、随机存取存储器等)等。该存储单元用于存储指令,上述处理单元1320执行该存储单元所存储的指令,以使该通信装置执行上述方法。Optionally, the device 1300 further includes a storage unit, which may be a memory, an internal storage unit (e.g., a register, a cache, etc.), an external storage unit (e.g., a read-only memory, a random access memory, etc.), etc. The storage unit is used to store instructions, and the processing unit 1320 executes the instructions stored in the storage unit so that the communication device executes the above method.
一种设计中,该装置1300可以用于执行上文各个方法实施例中编码器所执行的动作,如该装置1300可以用于执行上文方法700或方法1100中的编码器所执行的动作。这时,该装置1300可以为编码器的组成部件,收发单元1310用于执行上文方法实施例中编码器的收发相关的操作,处理单元1320用于执行上文方法实施例中编码器的处理相关的操作。In one design, the device 1300 may be used to perform the actions performed by the encoder in the above method embodiments, such as the device 1300 may be used to perform the actions performed by the encoder in the above method 700 or method 1100. In this case, the device 1300 may be a component of the encoder, the transceiver unit 1310 is used to perform the transceiver-related operations of the encoder in the above method embodiments, and the processing unit 1320 is used to perform the processing-related operations of the encoder in the above method embodiments.
例如,处理单元1320,用于对M个信道信息进行压缩,得到第一序列,所述M个信道信息为测量的L个信道信息的部分或全部,L小于或者等于N,N为基于K个天线端口组上的参考信号决定的信道信息的个数,N为正整数,所述第一序列为对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量;处理单元1320,还用于根据所述第一序列确定第二序列,所述第二序列为对应所述M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量;收发单元1310,用于向解码器发送所述第二序列。For example, the processing unit 1320 is used to compress M channel information to obtain a first sequence, where the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, L is less than or equal to N, N is the number of channel information determined based on reference signals on K antenna port groups, N is a positive integer, and the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information; the processing unit 1320 is also used to determine a second sequence based on the first sequence, where the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information; the transceiver unit 1310 is used to send the second sequence to the decoder.
可选的,处理单元1320,还用于确定所述N个信道信息在所述编码器输入端的堆叠位置与所述M个信道信息在所述编码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系;处理单元还用于根据所述对应关系确定对应所述M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量。Optionally, the processing unit 1320 is further used to determine the correspondence between the stacking positions of the N channel information at the encoder input end and the stacking positions of the M channel information at the encoder input end; the processing unit is also used to determine Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to the M channel information based on the correspondence.
可选的,处理单元1320还用于确定所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别。Optionally, the processing unit 1320 is further configured to determine accuracy levels corresponding to the M channel information.
应理解,收发单元1310以及处理单元1320还可以执行上述方法700或方法1100中任一方法中由编码器所执行的其他操作,这里不再一一详述。It should be understood that the transceiver unit 1310 and the processing unit 1320 may also perform other operations performed by the encoder in any of the above methods 700 or 1100, which will not be described in detail here.
一种设计中,该装置1300可以用于执行上文各个方法实施例中解码器所执行的动作,如该装置1300可以用于执行上文方法700或方法1100中的解码器所执行的动作。这时,该装置1300可以为解码器的组成部件,收发单元1310用于执行上文方法实施例中解码器侧的收发相关的操作,处理单元1320用于执行上文方法实施例中解码器侧的处理相关的操作。In one design, the device 1300 may be used to perform the actions performed by the decoder in the above method embodiments, such as the device 1300 may be used to perform the actions performed by the decoder in the above method 700 or method 1100. In this case, the device 1300 may be a component of the decoder, the transceiver unit 1310 is used to perform the transceiver-related operations on the decoder side in the above method embodiments, and the processing unit 1320 is used to perform the processing-related operations on the decoder side in the above method embodiments.
例如,收发单元1310,用于接收第二序列,所述第二序列为对应M个信道信息的Y个联合反馈量,所述M个信道信息为测量的L个信道信息的部分或全部,L小于或者等于N,N为基于K个天线端口组上的参考信号决定的信道信息的个数,N为正整数;处理单元1320,用于根据所述第二序列确定第一序列,所述第一序列为对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量;处理单元1320还用于对所述第一序列进行重构,得到所述M个信道信息。For example, the transceiver unit 1310 is used to receive a second sequence, where the second sequence is Y joint feedback amounts corresponding to M channel information, where the M channel information is part or all of L measured channel information, where L is less than or equal to N, where N is the number of channel information determined based on reference signals on K antenna port groups, and N is a positive integer; the processing unit 1320 is used to determine a first sequence according to the second sequence, where the first sequence is X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information; and the processing unit 1320 is also used to reconstruct the first sequence to obtain the M channel information.
可选的,处理单元1320还用于确定所述M个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置与所述N个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系;处理单元还用于根据所述对应关系确定对应所述N个信道信息的X个联合反馈量。Optionally, the processing unit 1320 is further used to determine the correspondence between the stacking positions of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the stacking positions of the N channel information at the decoder input end; the processing unit is also used to determine X joint feedback amounts corresponding to the N channel information according to the correspondence.
可选的,处理单元1320还用于确定所述M个信道信息对应的精度级别。Optionally, the processing unit 1320 is further configured to determine accuracy levels corresponding to the M channel information.
可选的,处理单元1320还用于确定所述M个信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置与所述N个 信道信息在所述解码器输入端的堆叠位置的对应关系;处理单元1320还用于根据所述对应关系确定所述M个信道信息。Optionally, the processing unit 1320 is further configured to determine the stacking position of the M channel information at the decoder input end and the N channel information at the decoder input end. The processing unit 1320 is further configured to determine the M channel information according to the corresponding relationship.
应理解,收发单元1310以及处理单元1320还可以执行上述方法700或方法1100中任一方法中由终端设备所执行的其他操作,这里不再一一详述。It should be understood that the transceiver unit 1310 and the processing unit 1320 may also execute other operations performed by the terminal device in any of the above-mentioned methods 700 or 1100, which are not described in detail here.
还应理解,这里的装置1300以功能单元的形式体现。这里的术语“单元”可以指应用特有集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、电子电路、用于执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器(例如共享处理器、专有处理器或组处理器等)和存储器、合并逻辑电路和/或其它支持所描述的功能的合适组件。在一个可选例子中,本领域技术人员可以理解,装置1300可以具体为上述实施例中的网络设备,可以用于执行上述各方法实施例中与网络设备对应的各个流程和/或步骤,为避免重复,在此不再赘述。It should also be understood that the device 1300 here is embodied in the form of a functional unit. The term "unit" here may refer to an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an electronic circuit, a processor (such as a shared processor, a dedicated processor or a group processor, etc.) and a memory for executing one or more software or firmware programs, a combined logic circuit and/or other suitable components that support the described functions. In an optional example, those skilled in the art can understand that the device 1300 can be specifically a network device in the above-mentioned embodiments, and can be used to execute the various processes and/or steps corresponding to the network device in the above-mentioned method embodiments. To avoid repetition, it will not be repeated here.
上述各个方案的装置1300具有实现上述方法中的设备所执行的相应步骤的功能,或者,上述各个方案的装置1300具有实现上述方法中网络设备所执行的相应步骤的功能。功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块;例如收发单元可以由收发机替代(例如,收发单元中的发送单元可以由发送机替代,收发单元中的接收单元可以由接收机替代),其它单元,如处理单元等可以由处理器替代,分别执行各个方法实施例中的收发操作以及相关的处理操作。The apparatus 1300 of each of the above-mentioned schemes has the function of implementing the corresponding steps executed by the device in the above-mentioned method, or the apparatus 1300 of each of the above-mentioned schemes has the function of implementing the corresponding steps executed by the network device in the above-mentioned method. The function can be implemented by hardware, or the corresponding software can be implemented by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions; for example, the transceiver unit can be replaced by a transceiver (for example, the sending unit in the transceiver unit can be replaced by a transmitter, and the receiving unit in the transceiver unit can be replaced by a receiver), and other units, such as the processing unit, can be replaced by a processor to respectively perform the sending and receiving operations and related processing operations in each method embodiment.
此外,上述收发单元1310还可以是收发电路(例如可以包括接收电路和发送电路),处理单元可以是处理电路。In addition, the transceiver unit 1310 may also be a transceiver circuit (for example, may include a receiving circuit and a sending circuit), and the processing unit may be a processing circuit.
需要指出的是,图13中的装置可以是前述实施例中的网元或设备,也可以是芯片或者芯片系统,例如:片上系统(system on chip,SoC)。其中,收发单元可以是输入输出电路、通信接口;处理单元为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。在此不做限定。It should be noted that the device in FIG. 13 may be a network element or device in the aforementioned embodiment, or may be a chip or a chip system, such as a system on chip (SoC). The transceiver unit may be an input and output circuit or a communication interface; the processing unit may be a processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip. This is not limited here.
图14是本申请实施例提供的一种通信架构的示意图。图14所示的通信装置1400包括:处理器1410、存储器1420和收发器1430。该处理器1410与存储器1420耦合,用于执行存储器1420中存储的指令,以控制收发器1430发送信号和/或接收信号。Figure 14 is a schematic diagram of a communication architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1400 shown in Figure 14 includes: a processor 1410, a memory 1420 and a transceiver 1430. The processor 1410 is coupled to the memory 1420 and is used to execute instructions stored in the memory 1420 to control the transceiver 1430 to send and/or receive signals.
应理解,上述处理器1410和存储器1420可以合成一个处理装置,处理器1410用于执行存储器1420中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器1420也可以集成在处理器1410中,或者独立于处理器1410。应理解,处理器1410也可以和前面通信装置中的各个处理单元相对应,收发器1430可以和前面通信装置中的各个接收单元和发送单元相对应。It should be understood that the processor 1410 and the memory 1420 can be combined into a processing device, and the processor 1410 is used to execute the program code stored in the memory 1420 to implement the above functions. In specific implementation, the memory 1420 can also be integrated into the processor 1410, or independent of the processor 1410. It should be understood that the processor 1410 can also correspond to each processing unit in the above communication device, and the transceiver 1430 can correspond to each receiving unit and sending unit in the above communication device.
还应理解,收发器1430可以包括接收器(或者称,接收机)和发射器(或者称,发射机)。收发器还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。收发器还可以是通信接口或者接口电路。It should also be understood that the transceiver 1430 may include a receiver (or receiver) and a transmitter (or transmitter). The transceiver may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more. The transceiver may also be a communication interface or interface circuit.
具体地,该通信装置1400可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法700或方法1100中的终端设备。该通信装置1400可以包括方法700或方法1100中的由编码器执行的方法的单元。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Specifically, the communication device 1400 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 700 or the method 1100 according to the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1400 may include a unit of the method performed by the encoder in the method 700 or the method 1100. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the above corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above method embodiment, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
当该通信装置1400为芯片时,该芯片包括接口单元和处理单元。其中,接口单元可以是输入输出电路或通信接口;处理单元可以为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。When the communication device 1400 is a chip, the chip includes an interface unit and a processing unit, wherein the interface unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface; and the processing unit may be a processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or an instruction in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiment of the present application can be directly embodied as a hardware processor for execution, or a combination of hardware and software modules in a processor for execution. The software module can be located in a storage medium mature in the art such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory or an electrically erasable programmable memory, a register, etc. The storage medium is located in a memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in conjunction with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it is not described in detail here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器, 处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in the embodiment of the present application can be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the above method embodiment can be completed by the hardware integrated logic circuit in the processor or the instructions in the form of software. The above processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components. The various methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor or the processor can also be any conventional processor, etc. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiment of the present application can be directly embodied as a hardware decoding processor for execution, or can be executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory or an electrically erasable programmable memory, a register, etc. The storage medium is located in a memory, The processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读介质,其上存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。The present application also provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored. When the computer program is executed by a computer, the functions of any of the above method embodiments are implemented.
本申请还提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。The present application also provides a computer program product, which implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments when executed by a computer.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the process or function described in the embodiment of the present application is generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions can be transmitted from a website site, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (digital subscriber line, DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) mode to another website site, computer, server or data center. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated. The available medium may be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (e.g., a high-density digital video disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., a solid state disk (SSD)), etc.
在本申请实施例中,“示例的”、“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用示例的一词旨在以具体方式呈现概念。In the embodiments of the present application, words such as "exemplary" and "for example" are used to indicate examples, illustrations or descriptions. Any embodiment or design described as "exemplary" in the present application should not be interpreted as being more preferred or more advantageous than other embodiments or designs. Specifically, the use of the word "exemplary" is intended to present concepts in a concrete way.
应理解,说明书通篇中提到的“实施例”意味着与实施例有关的特定特征、结构或特性包括在本申请的至少一个实施例中。因此,在整个说明书各个实施例未必一定指相同的实施例。此外,这些特定的特征、结构或特性可以任意适合的方式结合在一个或多个实施例中。It should be understood that the "embodiment" mentioned throughout the specification means that the specific features, structures or characteristics related to the embodiment are included in at least one embodiment of the present application. Therefore, the various embodiments in the entire specification do not necessarily refer to the same embodiment. In addition, these specific features, structures or characteristics can be combined in one or more embodiments in any suitable manner.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。本申请中所有节点、消息的名称仅仅是本申请为描述方便而设定的名称,在实际网络中的名称可能不同,不应理解本申请限定各种节点、消息的名称,相反,任何具有和本申请中用到的节点或消息具有相同或类似功能的名称都视作本申请的方法或等效替换,都在本申请的保护范围之内。It should be understood that in various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence number of each process does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application. The names of all nodes and messages in this application are merely names set by this application for the convenience of description. The names in the actual network may be different. It should not be understood that this application limits the names of various nodes and messages. On the contrary, any name with the same or similar function as the node or message used in this application is regarded as the method or equivalent replacement of this application, and is within the scope of protection of this application.
还应理解,在本申请中,“当…时”、“若”以及“如果”均指在某种客观情况下UE或者基站会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求UE或基站实现时一定要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。It should also be understood that in the present application, "when", "if" and "if" all mean that the UE or base station will take corresponding actions under certain objective circumstances. It is not a time limit, and it does not require the UE or base station to make judgments when implementing it, nor does it mean that there are other limitations.
另外,本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。In addition, the terms "system" and "network" are often used interchangeably in this article. The term "and/or" in this article is only a description of the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone.
本文中术语“……中的至少一个”或“……中的至少一种”,表示所列出的各项的全部或任意组合,例如,“A、B和C中的至少一种”,可以表示:单独存在A,单独存在B,单独存在C,同时存在A和B,同时存在B和C,同时存在A、B和C这六种情况。本文中的“至少一个”表示一个或者多个。“多个”表示两个或者两个以上。The term "at least one of..." or "at least one of..." herein refers to all or any combination of the listed items. For example, "at least one of A, B, and C" may refer to the following six situations: A exists alone, B exists alone, C exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, B and C exist at the same time, and A, B, and C exist at the same time. "At least one" herein refers to one or more. "More than one" refers to two or more.
应理解,在本申请各实施例中,“术语“包括”、“包含”、“具有”及它们的变形都意味着“包括但不限于”,除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。It should be understood that in each embodiment of the present application, the terms “including”, “comprising”, “having” and their variations all mean “including but not limited to”, unless otherwise specifically emphasized.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,第一、第二以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如,区分不同的信息等。It should be understood that in various embodiments of the present application, the first, second and various digital numbers are only used for the convenience of description and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, to distinguish different information.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can refer to the corresponding processes in the aforementioned method embodiments and will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式 实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. Implementation. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be essentially or partly embodied in the form of a software product that contributes to the prior art. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions for a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk, and other media that can store program codes.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。 The above is only a specific implementation of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person skilled in the art who is familiar with the present technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application, which should be included in the protection scope of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be based on the protection scope of the claims.
Claims (32)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202311292016.XA CN119727823A (en) | 2023-09-28 | 2023-09-28 | Method and communication device for feeding back channel status |
| CN202311292016.X | 2023-09-28 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025067077A1 true WO2025067077A1 (en) | 2025-04-03 |
Family
ID=95095973
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/120114 Pending WO2025067077A1 (en) | 2023-09-28 | 2024-09-20 | Channel state feedback method and communication apparatus |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN119727823A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2025067077A1 (en) |
Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN104734753A (en) * | 2012-06-18 | 2015-06-24 | 三星电子株式会社 | Method, user equipment and base station for sending and receiving channel state information |
| CN113424455A (en) * | 2019-02-15 | 2021-09-21 | 高通股份有限公司 | Coefficient indication for channel state information |
| CN114520680A (en) * | 2020-11-20 | 2022-05-20 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Information transmission method, device, communication equipment and storage medium |
-
2023
- 2023-09-28 CN CN202311292016.XA patent/CN119727823A/en active Pending
-
2024
- 2024-09-20 WO PCT/CN2024/120114 patent/WO2025067077A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN104734753A (en) * | 2012-06-18 | 2015-06-24 | 三星电子株式会社 | Method, user equipment and base station for sending and receiving channel state information |
| CN113424455A (en) * | 2019-02-15 | 2021-09-21 | 高通股份有限公司 | Coefficient indication for channel state information |
| CN114520680A (en) * | 2020-11-20 | 2022-05-20 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Information transmission method, device, communication equipment and storage medium |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
| Title |
|---|
| CATT: "Further details on CSI enhancement for Rel-17", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2109190, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20211011 - 20211019, 1 October 2021 (2021-10-01), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052058147 * |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN119727823A (en) | 2025-03-28 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US20250081205A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| CN116260552A (en) | A method and device for sending and receiving CSI | |
| WO2023279947A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2023006096A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| CN107896122A (en) | A beam scanning and search tracking method and device | |
| WO2025067077A1 (en) | Channel state feedback method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2024169757A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2024208296A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2023174108A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025067480A1 (en) | Communication method, apparatus and system | |
| US20250088258A1 (en) | Model application method and apparatus | |
| WO2025227525A1 (en) | A communication method, apparatus and system | |
| US20250053874A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for sequential learning of two-sided artificial intelligence/machine learning model for feedback of channel state information in communication system | |
| WO2025092630A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025209331A1 (en) | Information transmission method, apparatus, and system | |
| WO2025161853A1 (en) | Model monitoring method, apparatus and system | |
| WO2025209305A1 (en) | Information transmission method, apparatus and system | |
| WO2024208316A1 (en) | Compression information feedback method, and apparatus | |
| WO2025185425A1 (en) | Wireless model, information processing method and device, and system | |
| WO2025209317A1 (en) | Channel feedback information transmission method and apparatus | |
| WO2025139843A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2024172732A1 (en) | Target channel state information (csi) based channel quality indicator (cqi) | |
| KR20240007590A (en) | Method and apparatus for feedback based on artificial neural network | |
| WO2025140663A1 (en) | Model data acquisition method, apparatus and system | |
| KR20250012658A (en) | Communication method and device |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24870621 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |